Sunteți pe pagina 1din 426

Cover

ND-70928(E) ISSUE 1

Installation Procedure Manual

NOVEMBER, 1999

NEC Corporation

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER NEC Corporation reserves the right to change the specifications, functions, or features, at any time, without notice. NEC Corporation has prepared this document for use by its employees and customers. The information contained herein is the property of NEC Corporation and shall not be reproduced without prior written approval from NEC Corporation. NEAX and Dterm are registered trademarks of NEC Corporation. Copyright 1999 NEC Corporation Printed in Japan

NEAX 2000 IVS2 NEAX 2000/NEAX 7400 ICS M100MX Installation Procedure Manual

ND-70928(E) ISSUE 1 Addendum-001 MARCH, 2000

GENERAL
This addendum supplements the NEAX2000 IVS2/NEAX2000/NEAX7400 ICS M100MX Installation Procedure Manual [ND-70928(E)].

REASON FOR ISSUED


This addendum is issued in order to add the circuit card for UK (PZ-PW126, PN-2BRTK, PN-8COTU), the SN741 ATTCON for UK, PN-4VCTI, PN-IPTB cards, how to install the optical interface, and to correct errors.

PAGE REPLACEMENT INSTRUCTION


Replace pages: ii~v, 2, 15, 16, 18, 19, 21, 25~30, 34, 41, 43, 44, 50, 52, 83~85, 87, 88, 90~92, 94, 96, 99, 100, 128, 158~167, 169~174, 177, 188~190, 192, 199, 201, 203, 209, 224, 247, 256, 268, 269, 283, 290~293, 299, 321, 323, 377, 383, 384, 386. Add pages: 15-1, 15-2, 143-1~143-4, 167-1, 167-2, 221-1~221-4, 247-1~247-6, 338-1, 338-2.

Addendum Revision Sheet


PAGE No. i ii iii iv v vi 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 15-1 15-2 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 ADDENDUM-002 DATE ADDENDUM-006 DATE DATE DATE ADDENDUM-007 DATE 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 ADD. No. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 PAGE No. 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 ADDENDUM-003 DATE ADDENDUM-008 ADDENDUM-004 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 ADD. No. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008

ADDENDUM-001 DATE MARCH, 2000 ADDENDUM-005 DATE

NEAX 2000/NEAX 7400 ICS M100MX Installation Procedure Manual

Addendum Revision Sheet 1/6

ND-70928(E) ISSUE 1

PAGE No. 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106

ADD. No. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008

PAGE No. 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120

ADD. No. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008

1.1 1.1 1.1

121 122 123 124

1.1 1.1

125 126 127

1.1 1.1 1.1

128 129 130 131

1.1

1.1

132 133

1.1

134 135 136

1.1 1.1

137 138 139 140 141 142 143 143-1 ADDENDUM-002 DATE ADDENDUM-006 DATE DATE DATE ADDENDUM-007 DATE 1.1 ADDENDUM-004 DATE ADDENDUM-008

ADDENDUM-001 DATE MARCH, 2000 ADDENDUM-005 DATE

ADDENDUM-003

NEAX 2000/NEAX 7400 ICS M100MX Installation Procedure Manual

Addendum Revision Sheet 2/6

ND-70928(E) ISSUE 1

PAGE No. 143-2 143-3 143-4 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 167-1 167-2 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176

ADD. No. 001 1.1 1.1 1.1 002 003 004 005 006 007 008

PAGE No. 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193

ADD. No. 001 1.1 002 003 004 005 006 007 008

1.1 1.1 1.1

1.1

1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1

194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 1.1 1.1 1.1

1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1

207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 ADDENDUM-002 DATE ADDENDUM-006 DATE DATE DATE ADDENDUM-007 DATE ADDENDUM-003 DATE ADDENDUM-008 ADDENDUM-004 1.1

ADDENDUM-001 DATE MARCH, 2000 ADDENDUM-005 DATE

NEAX 2000/NEAX 7400 ICS M100MX Installation Procedure Manual

Addendum Revision Sheet 3/6

ND-70928(E) ISSUE 1

PAGE No. 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 221-1 221-2 221-3 221-4 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 247-1

ADD. No. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008

PAGE No. 247-2 247-3 247-4 247-5 247-6 248 249

ADD. No. 001 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 002 003 004 005 006 007 008

1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1

250 251 252 253 254 255

1.1

256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278

1.1

1.1 1.1

1.1 1.1 ADDENDUM-002 DATE ADDENDUM-006 DATE

279 280 ADDENDUM-003 DATE ADDENDUM-007 DATE DATE DATE ADDENDUM-008 ADDENDUM-004

ADDENDUM-001 DATE MARCH, 2000 ADDENDUM-005 DATE

NEAX 2000/NEAX 7400 ICS M100MX Installation Procedure Manual

Addendum Revision Sheet 4/6

ND-70928(E) ISSUE 1

PAGE No. 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318

ADD. No. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008

PAGE No. 319 320

ADD. No. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008

1.1

321 322 323 324 325 326 327

1.1

1.1

1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1

328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336

1.1

337 338 338-1 338-2 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 ADDENDUM-002 DATE ADDENDUM-006 DATE DATE DATE ADDENDUM-007 DATE ADDENDUM-003 DATE ADDENDUM-008 ADDENDUM-004 1.1 1.1

ADDENDUM-001 DATE MARCH, 2000 ADDENDUM-005 DATE

NEAX 2000/NEAX 7400 ICS M100MX Installation Procedure Manual

Addendum Revision Sheet 5/6

ND-70928(E) ISSUE 1

PAGE No. 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390

ADD. No. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008

PAGE No.

ADD. No. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008

1.1

1.1 1.1

1.1

ADDENDUM-001 DATE MARCH, 2000 ADDENDUM-005 DATE DATE DATE

ADDENDUM-002 DATE ADDENDUM-006 DATE

ADDENDUM-003 DATE ADDENDUM-007 DATE

ADDENDUM-004

ADDENDUM-008

NEAX 2000/NEAX 7400 ICS M100MX Installation Procedure Manual

Addendum Revision Sheet 6/6

ND-70928(E) ISSUE 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ................................................................................................... INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................. PURPOSE .................................................................................................................... OUTLINE OF THIS MANUAL ...................................................................................... REFERENCE MANUAL ............................................................................................... CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION ........................................................................ TRUNKING DIAGRAM ................................................................................................ SYSTEM CONFIGURATION .......................................................................................
Floor Standing Installation ............................................................................................... Wall Mounting Installation ................................................................................................ 19-inch Rack Mounting Installation .................................................................................

1 3 3 3 4 5 6 8 8 11 12 13 13 15 16 20 26 29 29 31 32 35 37 38 38 39 41 43 44 45 47 47 47 49 50 50 52

EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION .........................................................................


Module/Installation Hardware ........................................................................................... Control Card ....................................................................................................................... Application Processor Card ............................................................................................. Line/Trunk Card .................................................................................................................

LINE CONDITIONS OF EACH TERMINAL ................................................................. MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARD .........................................................
Circuit Card Mounting Slots ............................................................................................. Control Card Mounting Conditions .................................................................................. Application Processor Card Mounting Conditions ........................................................ Line/Trunk Card Mounting Conditions ............................................................................

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION ......................................................................................... PRECAUTIONS ...........................................................................................................


Grounding Requirements ................................................................................................. Static Electricity Guard ..................................................................................................... Procedure for Unplugging/Plugging Circuit Cards ........................................................ Turning Power ON ............................................................................................................. Turning Power OFF ...........................................................................................................

PROCEDURE ...............................................................................................................
Stationary Equipment (For North America/Australia) ..................................................... Fixed Equipment (For North America/Australia) ............................................................. Fixed Equipment (For Other Countries) ...........................................................................

UNPACKING ................................................................................................................ WIRING AC CORD TO TERMINALS ...........................................................................


Using AC CORD-D .............................................................................................................. Using Installation Cable .....................................................................................................

i
90TOC-11

TABLE OF CONTENTS 54 54 72 75 82 POWER CABLE CONNECTION .................................................................................. 83 Connection of AC CORD-B ............................................................................................... 84 Connection of DC Power Cable ........................................................................................ 85 SUPPLY VOLTAGE CHECK AND HEAT RUN TEST ................................................. 90 Precautions ........................................................................................................................ 90 Power Routing ................................................................................................................... 91 Checking for Supply Voltage ............................................................................................ 92 Heat Run Test ..................................................................................................................... 92 BATTERY CONNECTION ........................................................................................... 94 Internal Battery Connection .............................................................................................. 96 External / BATTM Battery Connection ............................................................................. 99 CABLE RUNNING TO MDF.......................................................................................... 102 Installation of External MDF ............................................................................................. 102 MDF Cable .......................................................................................................................... 103 Cable Running to External MDF ....................................................................................... 106 TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF ........................................................................ 109 Cable Connection to MDF .................................................................................................. 109 Location of Each LEN......................................................................................................... 110 LTC Connector Pin Arrangement ..................................................................................... 113 MDF Cross Connections ................................................................................................... 122 INSTALLATION OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT ....................................................... 128 Peripheral Equipment and Card List ................................................................................ 128 Analog C.O. Trunk (COT) .................................................................................................. 129 Tie Line Trunk (LDT/ODT) ................................................................................................. 130 DID Trunk (AUC/DIT) .......................................................................................................... 135 Digital Trunk Interface(DTI) ............................................................................................... 137 Optical Interface (M10) .................................................................................................... 143-1 Single Line Telephone (LC/AUC) ...................................................................................... 144 Dterm/DSS Console (DLC) .................................................................................................. 146 SN716 DESKCON (DLC) .................................................................................................... 148 SN610/708/709/712/741 ATTCON (DLC) ........................................................................... 158 Day/Night Mode Change by External Key (DK/MP) ........................................................ 168 External TAS Indicator (DK) .............................................................................................. 169 Paging Equipment (COT and DK/MP) .............................................................................. 172 External Tone Source/Announcement Machine (DK/TNT/MP) ...................................... 175
Floor Standing Installation ............................................................................................... Wall Mounting Installation ................................................................................................ 19-inch Rack Mounting Installation ................................................................................. BUS Cable Connection ......................................................................................................

INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT .....................................................................

ii

Rev.1.1 90TOC-11

TABLE OF CONTENTS
External BGM Source (COT/TNT/MP) ............................................................................... Power Failure Transfer (AUC) ........................................................................................... Power Failure Transfer (8PFT) .......................................................................................... Alarm Display Panel (MP) ................................................................................................. Built-in SMDR (MP) ............................................................................................................ SMDR/PMS/MCI/CIS Printer/Hotel Printer (AP00) ...........................................................

MOUNTING CIRCUIT CARDS ..................................................................................... SYSTEM INITIALIZATION ...........................................................................................


All Clear, Except LEN000 CAT .......................................................................................... Resident System Program ................................................................................................

SYSTEM DATA ENTRY ...............................................................................................


CAT ..................................................................................................................................... MAT ...................................................................................................................................... Confirming Lamp Indication .............................................................................................

OPERATION TEST ...................................................................................................... SYSTEM DATA SAVE ................................................................................................. CLEANING AND VISUAL CHECK ..............................................................................
Cleaning .............................................................................................................................. Visual Check ......................................................................................................................

180 182 185 190 191 194 199 201 201 201 202 202 203 203 204 205 205 205 205

CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS ...................................... 207 HOW TO READ THIS CHAPTER ................................................................................ 208 CONTROL CARD ........................................................................................................ 209 PN-CP14 (MP) ..................................................................................................................... 210 PN-CP15 (FP) ...................................................................................................................... 215 PN-PW00 (EXTPWR) .......................................................................................................... 217 PZ-PW121 (AC/DC PWR) ................................................................................................... 219 PZ-PW126 (AC/DC PWR) ................................................................................................ 221-1 PZ-PW122 (DC/DC PWR) ................................................................................................... 222 APPLICATION PROCESSOR CARD .......................................................................... 224 PN-AP00-A (DBM) .............................................................................................................. 226 PN-AP00-B (AP00) ............................................................................................................. 229 PN-AP01 (AP01) ................................................................................................................. 235 PN-BRTA (BRT) .................................................................................................................. 238 PN-2BRTC (BRT) ................................................................................................................ 243 PN-2BRTK (BRT) ............................................................................................................. 247-1 PN-CC01 (ETHER) .............................................................................................................. 248 PN-DAIA (DAI) .................................................................................................................... 252 PN-DAIB (DAI) .................................................................................................................... 257 PN-DAIC (DAI) .................................................................................................................... 261 PN-DAID (DAI) .................................................................................................................... 264

iii

Rev.1.1 90TOC-11

TABLE OF CONTENTS 270 274 278 284 290 294 300 302 304 307 310 312 314 317 319 LINE/TRUNK CARD .................................................................................................... 321 PN-2AMPA (AMP) ............................................................................................................... 324 PN-AUCA (AUC) ................................................................................................................. 325 PN-CFTA (CFT) ................................................................................................................... 326 PN-CFTB (CFT) ................................................................................................................... 327 PN-2COTD (COT) ............................................................................................................... 328 PN-4COTA-A (COT) ............................................................................................................ 329 PN-4COTB (COT) ............................................................................................................... 330 PN-4COTE (COT) ................................................................................................................ 331 PN-4COTF (COT) ................................................................................................................ 332 PN-4COTG (COT) ............................................................................................................... 333 PN-6COTJ (COT) ................................................................................................................ 334 PN-8COTQ (COT) ............................................................................................................... 335 PN-8COTR (COT) ............................................................................................................... 336 PN-8COTS (COT) ................................................................................................................ 337 PN-8COTT (COT) ................................................................................................................ 338 PN-8COTU (COT) ............................................................................................................ 338-1 PN-2CSIA (CSI) ................................................................................................................... 339 PN-2CSIA-A (CSI) ............................................................................................................... 342 PN-4DATC (DAT) ................................................................................................................ 345 PN-2DITA (DIT) ................................................................................................................... 346 PN-4DITB (DIT) ................................................................................................................... 347 PN-DK00 (DK) ..................................................................................................................... 348 PN-2DLCB/PN-2DLCN (DLC) ............................................................................................. 349 PN-2DLCC (DLC) ................................................................................................................ 350
PN-DAIE (DAI) .................................................................................................................... PN-DAIF (DAI) ..................................................................................................................... PN-24DTA-C (DTI) .............................................................................................................. PN-30DTC-A (DTI) .............................................................................................................. PN-IPTB (IPT) ..................................................................................................................... PN-24PRTA (PRT) .............................................................................................................. PN-4RSTB (MFR) ................................................................................................................ PN-4RSTC (CIR) ................................................................................................................. PN-SC00 (CCH) .................................................................................................................. PN-SC01 (DCH) .................................................................................................................. PN-SC03 (ICH) .................................................................................................................... PN-SC03-A (CSH) ............................................................................................................... PZ-M537 (EXPMEM) ........................................................................................................... PZ-M542 (CONN) ................................................................................................................ PZ-M557 (CONN) ................................................................................................................
iv

Rev.1.1 90TOC-11

TABLE OF CONTENTS
PN-4DLCF (DLC) ................................................................................................................ PN-4DLCM (DLC) ............................................................................................................... PN-4DLCQ (DLC) ................................................................................................................ PN-8DLCL (DLC) ................................................................................................................ PN-8DLCP (DLC) ................................................................................................................ PN-2DPCB (DPC) ............................................................................................................... PN-2ILCA (ILC) ................................................................................................................... PN-4LCC (LC) ..................................................................................................................... PN-4LCD-A (LC) ................................................................................................................. PN-4LCE (LC) ..................................................................................................................... PN-4LCF (LC) ..................................................................................................................... PN-4LCK (LC) ..................................................................................................................... PN-4LCL (LC) ..................................................................................................................... PN-4LCV (LC) ..................................................................................................................... PN-4LCW (LC) .................................................................................................................... PN-8LCAA (LC) .................................................................................................................. PN-2LDTA (LDT) ................................................................................................................. PN-M03 (M03) ..................................................................................................................... PN-M10 (M10) ..................................................................................................................... PN-2ODTA (ODT) ............................................................................................................... PN-2ODTB (ODT) ............................................................................................................... PN-8RSTA (PBR) ................................................................................................................ PN-TNTA (TNT) ................................................................................................................... PN-4VCTI (VCT) .................................................................................................................. PZ-8PFTB (PFT) ................................................................................................................. PZ-VM00/PZ-VM00-M (VM) ................................................................................................ PZ-VM01 (VM) .....................................................................................................................

351 352 353 354 355 356 360 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 376 378 379 380 381 383 385 386 389

Rev.1.1 90TOC-11

THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY.

vi
90TOC-11

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
(1) (2) Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm. Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specically designed for wet locations. Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface. Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines. Read and understand all instructions. Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product. Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning. Do not use this product near water; for example, under water pipes near a bath tub, sink, or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, or table. The product may fall, causing serious damage to the product.

(3)

(4) (5) (6) (7)

(8)

(9)

(10) Slots and openings in the cabinet and the back or bottom are provided for ventilation, to protect it from overheating, these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat register. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation unless proper ventilation is provided. (11) This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power source available, consult with your local power company. (12) This product normally connected with a three wire grounding type plug, a plug having a third (grounding) pin. This plug will only t into a grounding type power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact an electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding type plug.

1
90001-11

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

(13) Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not locate this product where the cord will be abused by persons walking on it. (14) Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in the risk of re or electric shock. (15) Never push objects of any kind into this product through cabinet slots as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a risk of re or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product. (16) To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not disassemble this product, but take it to a qualied serviceman when some service or repair work is required. Opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltages or other risks. Incorrect reassembly can cause electric shock when the appliance is subsequently used. (17) Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualied service personnel under the following conditions: (a) (b) (c) (d) When the power supply cord or plug is damaged or frayed. If liquid has been spilled into the product. If the product has been exposed to rain or water. If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls, that are covered by the operating instructions because improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualied technician to restore the product to normal operation. (e) If the product has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged. (f) If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance. (18) Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless type) during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. (19) Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.

WARNING
This is a product of Class A. In case of any functionality disturbance in the usage, it is requested to ask the supplier for the appropriate treatment.

Rev.1.1 90001-11

INTRODUCTION
PURPOSE / OUTLINE OF THIS MANUAL

INTRODUCTION
PURPOSE
This manual explains the installation procedure for the NEAX IVS-NEXT. This equipment can only be serviced by a qualied service person. You should perform each installation step according to the procedures described in CHAPTER 2.

OUTLINE OF THIS MANUAL


This manual consists of three chapters. The contents of CHAPTER 1 through 3 are outlined below. CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION This chapter explains the outline of system conguration, the name and functions of equipment, the line conditions of each terminal, and the mounting conditions of circuit cards used in the system. CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION This chapter explains how to install the PBX and the peripheral equipment, system initialization and data entry, and operation test procedures you should follow after completing the installation. CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS This chapter explains the meaning of lamp indications and the method of switch settings of each circuit card used in the system.

3
90003-10

INTRODUCTION
REFERENCE MANUAL

REFERENCE MANUAL
During installation, refer also to the manuals below: Command Manual: describes Customer Administration Terminal (CAT) operation, command function and setting data reguired for programming the system, and Resident System Program. Ofce Data Entry Sheet: contains the Customer Specication Sheet and Ofce Data Entry Sheet. Feature Programming Manual: describes procedure of each feature programming. Maintenance Manual: describes maintenance service features and the recommended troubleshooting procedure.

4
90003-10

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

This chapter explains the outline of system conguration, the name and functions of equipment, the line conditions of each terminal, and the mounting conditions of circuit cards used in the system.

TRUNKING DIAGRAM .............................................................. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ..................................................... EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION ...................................... LINE CONDITIONS OF EACH TERMINAL ............................... MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARD .......................

6 8 13 26 29

5
90005-10

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


TRUNKING DIAGRAM

TRUNKING DIAGRAM
This gure shows a typical trunking diagram for the system.

Trunking Diagram
NOTE: The equipment marked with (*) is provided by the customer.
PFT PFT

SINGLE LINE TEL LONG LINE STATION SINGLE LINE TEL WITH MESSAGE WAITING LAMP ISDN TERMINAL Dterm DSS LONG LINE Dterm DSS ATTCON (4 wire) ATTCON (2 wire)/ DESKCON PS CS/ZT

LC AUC LC

MP INCLUDING TDSW DTG PBSND 16CFT MLDT PLO MEM MODEM PBR DAT DK TNT SMDR

COT AMP AUC/DIT LDT ODT ODT DTI BRT PRT CCH DCH ICH ROUTER LD 2W E&M 4W E&M

C.O. LINE

DID LINE

ILC DLC

TIE LINE

DLC DLC DLC CSI

DIGITAL LINK ISDN NETWORK

SMDR PMS CIS/HOTEL PRINTER PC FOR OAI AD-8

AP00 EXPMEM VM

IPT VCT M10 PBR DAT OPTICAL FIBER

IP NETWORK DTI/REMOTE PIM

RS-232C

AP01 PBR ETHER

CIR MFR CFT 6/10 PARTY CONFERENCE KEY(*) ANNOUNCEMENT MACHINE(*) EXTERNAL HOLD TONE(*) AMPLIFIER SPEAKER(*)

PC FOR OAI DTE DTE MAT

TCP/IP V.11 RS-232C V.35 RS-232C

DPC M03

DK COT COT COT COT/TNT

RS-232C

(FOR REMOTE MAINTENANCE) MAT


PSTN

BGM (*) EXTERNAL HOLD TONE(*)

COT

TNT

6
90006-10

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


TRUNKING DIAGRAM

Description of Symbols in Trunking Diagram SYMBOL


AMP AP00 AP01 AUC BGM BRT CCH CFT CIS CIR COT CSI CS/ZT

DESCRIPTION
Amplier Trunk Card SMDR/Hotel Application Card OAI Interface Card Analog Universal Circuit Card (Long Line Circuit, DID Trunk) External Music Source for Dterm Back Ground Music Service Basic Rate Interface Trunk Card Common Channel Handler Card 6/10 Party Conference Trunk Card Call Information System CALLER ID Receiver Trunk Card C.O. Trunk Card CS/ZT Interface Card Cell Station (For Australia/Others) Zone Transceiver (For North America/Latin America)

SYMBOL
KEY LC LDT M03 M10 MAT MDF MEM MFR MLDT MODEM MP PFT PMS OAI ODT PBR PBSND PLO PS PRT SMDR TDSW TNT VCT VM 16CFT

DESCRIPTION
External Key Line Circuit Card (for Single Line Telephone) LD Trunk Card V.35 DTE Interface Card Optical Interface Card Maintenance Administration Terminal Main Distribution Frame Main Memory MF Receiver/ MFC Receiver/Sender Card Melody Trunk Modem Main Processor Card Power Failure Transfer Property Management System Open Application Interface OD Trunk Card (2/4 wire E&M) PB Receiver Card PB Sender Phase Locked Oscillator Personal Station ISDN Primary Rate Interface Trunk Card Station Message Detail Recording Time Division Switch Tone/Music Source Interface Card CODEC Card Voice Mail Card 16 Circuit Four Party Conference Trunk

DAT DCH DIT DK DLC

Digital Announcement Trunk Card D-channel Handler Card DID Trunk Card External Relay/Key Interface Card Digital Line Circuit Card (for Dterm, ATTCON, DESKCON) DPC Data Port Controller Card DSS DSS Console DTE Data Terminal Equipment DTI Digital Trunk Interface Card DTG Digital Tone Generator ETHER Ethernet Control Card EXPMEM Memory Expansion Card ICH ISDN-channel Handler Card ILC ISDN Line Circuit Card IPT IP Trunk Card

7
90006-10

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS

SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS
The system provides three installation methods as follows: Floor Standing Installation Wall Mounting Installation 19-inch Rack Mounting Installation Example of system congurations for each installation method are shown below.

Floor Standing Installation


1-PIM Conguration for Floor Standing Installation

223 (8.8) 430 (16.9)

PIM

416.6 (16.4)

UNIT : mm (inch)

FRONT

BASE

8
90008-10

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS

2-PIM Conguration for Floor Standing Installation


223 (8.8)

430 (16.9)

PIM

768.6 (30.2) PIM/BATTM

FRONT

BASE UNIT : mm (inch)

9
90008-10

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS

Maximum Conguration for Floor Standing Installation

223 (8.8) 860 (33.9)

PIM3

PIM2

PIM7

PIM1

PIM6

1472.6 (58.0)

1824.6 (71.8)

PIM0

PIM5

BATTM

PIM4

BATTM

FRONT

BASE UNIT : mm (inch)

10
90008-10

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS

Wall Mounting Installation


1-PIM Conguration for Wall-Mounting Installation

PIM

BASE

11
90008-10

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS

19-inch Rack Mounting Installation


1-PIM Conguration for 19-inch Rack Mounting Installation

PIM/BATTM 19BRACKET

BASE

19-inch RACK

12
90008-10

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION


This section explains the names and functions of the equipment (modules, installation hardware, circuit cards) used in the system.

Module/Installation Hardware
This table shows the names and functions of the modules.

Module Name and Function EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL NAME NAME


SN1480 PIMAF PIM

FUNCTION
Port Interface Module (PIM) Max.64 physical ports per PIM. Houses two batteries for protection from short power interruption (for 30 min.). At maximum conguration, the system consists of eight PIMs, and provides a total of 512 physical ports (64 ports x 8). Base/Top Cover Assembly One base and top cover assembly is required for each stack.

SN1545 BASERE TOP COVER ASSEM SN1526 BATTMF

BASE/TOP ASSEM

BATTM

Battery Module for housing PIM or CS (ZT) backup batteries Houses two pairs of batteries for protection from long power interruption (for 3 hours).

13

90013-11

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

This table shows the names and functions of installation hardware.

Installation Hardware Name and Function EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL NAME NAME


HANGER ASSEM (B)

FUNCTION
Wall Hanger Assembly One HANGER ASSEM is required per PIM for Wall Mounting Installation. Safety Mounting Bracket Used as an overhead hanger for Floor Standing Installation. Wire, chain or eyebolts are to be locally provided, to secure the bracket. To be installed on the top PIM in four or more modules of stack. It provides 1.1G shockproof construction. 19-inch Rack Mounting Bracket Type A One bracket is required for one PIM conguration. One bracket is required for the top PIM of multiple module conguration. 19-inch Rack Mounting Bracket Type B One bracket is required for the bottom module of multiple module conguration. Inter Frame Bracket Assembly Used to joint the frames in two-frame conguration, for Floor Standing Installation. Base Tray Assembly One BASE TRAY is required per one frame for Floor Standing Installation of Stationary Equipment.

MOUNTING BRACKET

19 RACK BRACKET (A)

19 RACK BRACKET (B)

I/F BRACKET ASSEM

BASE TRAY ASSEM

14

90013-11

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Control Card
This table shows the names and functions of each control card.

Control Card Name and Function EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL NAME NAME


PN-CP14 MP

FUNCTION
Main Processor Card Provides Memory, TDSW (1024CH x 1024CH), 16-line CFT, PB sender, Clock, PLO 2 ports (receiver mode/source mode), two RS-232C ports, 2-line DAT (Recording duration: Max. 128sec.), DK, 4-line PB receiver, Modem for remote maintenance (19.2kbps), internal Music-on-Hold tone source and BUS interface. BUS interface functions as a driver/receiver of various signals, adjusts gate delay timing and cable delay timing, monitors I/O Bus and PCM BUS. One card is required per system. Firmware Processor Card Provides Line/Trunk interface, Memory (RAM 768KB), and inter-module BUS interface. BUS interface functions as a driver/receiver of various signals, adjusts gate delay timing and cable delay timing, monitors I/O Bus and PCM BUS. When the system consists of three PIMs or more, one each of this card is mounted respectively in PIM0, PIM2, PIM4, and PIM6.
Continued on next page

PN-CP15

FP

15

Rev.1.1 90013-11

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Control Card Name and Function EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL NAME NAME


PN-PW00 EXTPWR

FUNCTION
Power Supply Card for DESKCON Provides 48V DC power. Max. 4 cards per frame (4PIMs). Max. 3 cards per PIM. Occupies two physical slots width per card. Main Power Supply Card Input: AC120V/240V (50Hz/60Hz) Output: 27V (4.4A), +5V (7.2A), CR (38mA), +90V (80mA) One card is pre-installed per PIM. Main Power Supply Card Input: AC240V (60Hz) Output: 27V (4.4A), +5V (7.2A), CR (38mA), +90V (80mA) One card is pre-installed per PIM. Power Supply Card for Cell Station (Zone Transceiver) Input: 24V DC Output: 48V DC (1.7A) One card per PIM. Max. 16 CS (ZT)s backed up by one card.

PZ-PW121

AC/DC PWR

PZ-PW126 [For UK]

AC/DC PWR

PZ-PW122

DC/DC PWR

15-1

Rev.1.1 90013-11

THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY.

15-2

Rev.1.1 90013-11

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Application Processor Card


This table shows the names and functions of each application processor card.

Application Processor Card Name and Function EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL NAME NAME
PN-AP00-A [For North America/ Latin America Only] PN-AP00-B DBM

FUNCTION
Data Base Module Card for WCS Roaming function One card per WCS system.

AP00

Application Processor Card Provides four RS-232C ports, and is used for SMDR, Hotel Printer, CIS, PMS, MCI, CS report functions. One card per system. Application Processor Card Provides one RS-232C port and one Ethernet interface port. Used for OAI function, ID code expansion. One card per system. 1-line Basic Rate (2B+D) Interface Trunk Card Accommodates one 2-channel PCM digital lines. 2-line Basic Rate (2B+D) Interface Trunk Card Accommodates two 2-channel PCM digital lines. 2-line Basic Rate (2B+D) Interface Trunk Card Accommodates two 2-channel PCM digital lines. Ethernet Control Card Used together with the PN-AP01 card to accommodate the Ethernet and transmit/receive a signal of TCP/IP protocol. 10 BASE-T twisted pair cable is connected directly to this card.
Continued on next page

PN-AP01

AP01

PN-BRTA PN-2BRTC PN-2BRTK [For UK] PN-CC01

BRT BRT BRT ETHER

16

Rev.1.1 90013-11

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Application Processor Card Name and Function EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL NAME NAME
PN-DAIA DAI

FUNCTION
Digital Trunk Interface (23B+D, 1.5Mbps) Card for Remote PIM Accomodates 24-channel PCM digital lines, and provides Firmware Processor and BUS interface. One through three cards must be provided at main site, which corresponds to the number of remote site. Digital Trunk Interface (23B+D, 1.5Mbps) Card for Remote PIM Accomodates 24-channel PCM digital lines, and provides Firmware Processor. One card is required per Remote PIM at remote site. Digital Trunk Interface (23B+D, 1.5Mbps) Channel Expansion Card Accomodates 24-channel PCM digital lines. One through six cards can be provided at main site. Two cards can be provided at remote site. Digital Trunk Interface (2Mbps) Card for Remote PIM Accomodates 30-channel PCM digital lines, and provides Firmware Processor and BUS interface. One though three cards must be provided at main site, which corresponds to the number of remote site. Digital Trunk Interface (2Mbps) Card for Remote PIM Accomodates 30-channel PCM digital lines, and provides Firmware Processor. One card is required per Remote PIM at remote site. Digital Trunk Interface (2Mbps) Channel Expansion Card Accomodates 30-channel PCM digital lines. One through three cards can be provided at main site. One card can be provided at remote site. Digital Trunk Interface (23B+D, 1.5Mbps) Card Accommodates 24-channel PCM digital lines. Digital Trunk Interface (2Mbps) Card Accommodates 30-channel PCM digital lines.
Continued on next page
17
90013-11

PN-DAIB

DAI

PN-DAIC

DAI

PN-DAID

DAI

PN-DAIE

DAI

PN-DAIF

DAI

PN-24DTA-C PN-30DTC-A

DTI DTI

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Application Processor Card Name and Function EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL NAME NAME
PN-IPTB IPT

FUNCTION
IP Trunk Card Accommodates the IP network and transmit/receive compressed voice or signals over IP network. Used together with max. four PN-4VCTI cards (16 channels). 10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX twisted pair cable is connected directly to this card. ISDN Primary Rate (23B+D) Interface Card Provides a built-in D-channel Handler (DCH). 4-line MF Receiver, MFC Receiver/Sender Card Used for MF/MFC-R2 Signaling on DID/DOD trunks. Max. four cards can be provided per system, including the PN-4RSTC card. 4-line Caller ID Receiver Trunk Card Used for Caller ID (CLASS SM) on analog trunks. Max. four cards per system, including the PN-4RSTB card. Common Channel Handler Card Transmits/receives signals on the common signalling channel of No. 7 CCIS. D-channel Handler Card Transmits/receives signals on the D-channel of ISDN Primary Rate (23B+D) interface or WCS Roaming interface. ISDN-channel Handler Card Provides the D-channel signaling interface and controls max. four ILC cards (Layer 2 and 3). CS(ZT) Handler Card Provides the D-channel signaling interface and controls max. four CSI cards, eight CS(ZT)s.
Continued on next page

PN-24PRTA PN-4RSTB

PRT MFR

PN-4RSTC

CIR

PN-SC00

CCH

PN-SC01

DCH

PN-SC03

ICH

PN-SC03-A

CSH

18

Rev.1.1 90013-11

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Application Processor Card Name and Function EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL NAME NAME
PZ-M537 EXPMEM

FUNCTION
Memory Expansion Card for MP/AP00 Card The system capacity is expanded as follows:
When mounted on PN-CP14 (MP) card: System Capacity
Line/Trunk DID dial conversion IP trunk Station Dterm Station+Dterm (24/32 button) D PS ISDN terminal Data station Call Forwarding-Outside set Authorization Code/ Forced Account Code/ Remote Access to System (DISA) Code Message Remider set Name Display/ Guest Name Display Speed Calling-Station (Station Speed Dial) set MP built-in SMDR call record
term

w/o EXPMEM
384 500 1 256 256 256 256 128 64 64 240 1000

with EXPMEM
768 1000 4 512 512 512 512 256 128 128 496 3000

512 256 4000 256

1024 512 10000 1280

When mounted on PN-AP00-B (AP00) card: System Capacity


SMDR call record

w/o EXPMEM
1600

with EXPMEM
27000

PZ-M542 [For Other Countries]

CONN

Coaxial Cable Connection Card Used to connect a coaxial cable for the Digital Trunk Interface. Max. two cards can be connected to LTC connector of each PIM. Coaxial Cable Connection Card Used to connect a coaxial cable for the Digital Trunk Interface. Max. two cards can be connected to LTC connector of each PIM.
19
Rev.1.1 90013-11

PZ-M557 [For Australia]

CONN

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Line/Trunk Card
This table shows the names and functions of each line/trunk card.

Line/Trunk Card Name and Function EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL NAME NAME


PN-2AMPA AMP

FUNCTION
2-line Amplier Trunk Card Provides Echo Canceller (EC), Automatic Gain Controller (AGC) and Tone Disabler (TD) functions. 2-line Analog Long Line Circuit Card provided with Power Failure Transfer (PFT) Function, or 2-line Direct Inward Dialing Trunk Card Line resistance in the case of a long line circuit: Max. 2500 ohms (inclusive of the internal resistance of the distant ofce equipment) Equipped with 48V DC-DC on-board power supply. 6/10 Party Conference Trunk Card Use of one card: Can control a conference of up to six participants. Use of two cards: Can control a conference of up to ten participants. 6 Party Conference Trunk Card One card can control a conference of up to ten participants. Occupies 8 time slots per one card. 2-line Central Ofce Trunk Card (Loop Start Trunk) Provides metering pulse detection function. 4-line Central Ofce Trunk Card (Loop Start Trunk) 4-line Central Ofce Trunk Card (Ground Start Trunk) Provides loop detection, sending/detecting ground on Tip/ Ring wire. 4-line Central Ofce Trunk Card (Loop Start/Ground Start Trunk) Provides loop holding, pulse sender, and a detector for ground signals.
Continued on next page

PN-AUCA

AUC

PN-CFTA

CFT

PN-CFTB

CFT

PN-2COTD [For Australia/Others] PN-4COTA-A PN-4COTB

COT

COT COT

PN-4COTF [For N.Z.]

COT

20
90013-11

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Line/Trunk Card Name and Function EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL NAME NAME


PN-4COTE [For Australia] PN-4COTG COT

FUNCTION
4-line Central Ofce Trunk Card (Loop Start Trunk) Provides a detector for line fault conditions. 4-line Central Ofce Trunk Card (Loop Start trunk) Provides loop detection, receiving/sending the Caller ID (CLASS SM) signal. 6-line Central Ofce Trunk Card (Loop Start Trunk) Provides a detector for line fault conditions. 8-line Central Ofce Trunk Card (Loop Start Trunk) Provides loop detection, receiving/sending the Caller ID (CLASS SM) signal. 8-line Central Ofce Trunk Card (Loop Start Trunk) 8-line Central Ofce Trunk Card (Ground Start Trunk) Provides loop detection, sending/detecting ground on Tip/ Ring wire. 8-line Central Ofce Trunk Card (Loop Start Trunk) Provides a detector for line fault conditions. 8-line Central Ofce Trunk Card (Loop Start Trunk) Provides loop detection. 2-line Zone Transceiver Interface Card Used to interface with the ZT, based on ISDN S-interface. Max. two ZTs can be connected per CSI card. Occupies 8 time slots per one card. 2-line Cell Station Interface Card Used to interface with the CS, based on ISDN S-interface. Max. two CSs can be connected per one card. Occupies 8 time slots per one card. 4-line Digital Announcement Trunk Card Recording duration: Max. 120 seconds Occupies 8 time slots per one card.
Continued on next page

COT

PN-6COTJ [For Australia] PN-8COTQ

COT

COT

PN-8COTR PN-8COTS

COT COT

PN-8COTT [For Australia] PN-8COTU [For UK] PN-2CSIA [For North America/ Latin America] PN-2CSIA-A [For Australia/Others] PN-4DATC

COT

COT CSI

CSI

DAT

21

Rev.1.1 90013-11

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Line/Trunk Card Name and Function EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL NAME NAME


PN-2DITA [For Hong Kong] PN-4DITB DIT

FUNCTION
2-line Direct Inward Dialing Trunk Card Provides loop detection, sending reverse signal and PB to DP signal conversion. Equipped with 48V DC-DC on-board power supply. 4-line Direct Inward Dialing Trunk Card Provides loop detection, sending reverse signal and PB to DP signal conversion. Equipped with 48V DC-DC on-board power supply. 8-circuit External Relay Control/External Key Scan Card Provides the above-mentioned control functions on a per circuit basis. 2-line Digital Long Line Circuit Card for Dterm75/65 (Series E/III), Dterm70/60 (Elite/Electra Pro), DSS Console, ATTCON [48V version, 2-wire type] Equipped with 48V DC-DC on-board power supply. 2-line Digital Long Line Circuit Card for SN610 ATTCON [48V version, 4-wire type] Equipped with 48V DC-DC on-board power supply. 4-line Digital Line Circuit Card for SN610 ATTCON [27V version, 4-wire type] 4-line Digital Line Circuit Card for Dterm75/65 (Series E/III), Dterm70/60 (Elite/Electra Pro), DSS Console, ATTCON, DESKCON [27V version, 2-wire type] 4-line Digital Line Circuit Card for Dterm75/65(Series E/III), DSS Console, ATTCON, DESKCON [27V version, 2-wire type] 8-line Digital Line Circuit Card for Dterm75/65 (Series E/III), Dterm70/60 (Elite/Electra Pro), DSS Console, ATTCON, DESKCON [27V version, 2-wire type]
Continued on next page

DIT

PN-DK00

DK

PN-2DLCB/ PN-2DLCN

DLC

PN-2DLCC

DLC

PN-4DLCF PN-4DLCM

DLC DLC

PN-4DLCQ

DLC

PN-8DLCL

DLC

22
90013-11

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Line/Trunk Card Name and Function EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL NAME NAME


PN-8DLCP DLC

FUNCTION
8-line Digital Line Circuit Card for Dterm75/65 (Series E/III), DSS Console, ATTCON, DESKCON [27V version, 2-wire type] 2-line Data Port Controller Card Used for the intra-ofce or inter-ofce digital data transmission on nailed down connection. Accommodates max. two DTEs with V.11 (X.21) interface or V.24/V.28 (RS-232C) interface. 2-line ISDN Line Circuit Card Provides a physical interface to ISDN Terminals. Occupies 8 time slots per one card. 4-line Analog Line Circuit Card for Single Line Telephones Loop resistance: Max. 600 ohms (including telephone set) 4-Line Analog Line Circuit Card for Single Line Telephones Loop resistance : Max. 600 ohms (including telephone set) Provides momentary open and Message Waiting Lamp control functions for each circuit. Equipped with +80V DC-DC on-board power supply. 4-line Analog Line Circuit Card for Single Line Telephones Loop resistance: Max. 600 ohms (including telephone set) 4-line Analog Line Circuit Card for Single Line Telephones Loop resistance: Max. 600 ohms (including telephone set) Provides Message Waiting Lamp control function for each circuit, and reverse function for only No.3 circuit. Equipped with +80V DC-DC on-board power supply. 4-Line Analog Line Circuit Card for Single Line Telephones Loop resistance : Max. 600 ohms (including telephone set)
Continued on next page

PN-2DPCB

DPC

PN-2ILCA

ILC

PN-4LCC [For Others] PN-4LCD-A

LC LC

PN-4LCE [For Australia] PN-4LCF [For Australia]

LC

LC

PN-4LCK [For China]

LC

23
90013-11

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Line/Trunk Card Name and Function EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL NAME NAME


PN-4LCL [For China] LC

FUNCTION
4-line Analog Line Circuit Card for Single Line Telephones Loop resistance : Max. 600 ohms (including telephone set) Provides Message Waiting Lamp control function for each circuit, and reverse function for only No.3 circuit. Equipped with +80V DC-DC on-board power supply. 4-Line Analog Line Circuit Card for Single Line Telephones Loop resistance : Max. 600 ohms (including telephone set) 4-line Analog Line Circuit Card for Single Line Telephones Loop resistance : Max. 600 ohms (including telephone set) Provides Message Waiting Lamp control function for each circuit, and reverse function for only No.3 circuit. Equipped with +80V DC-DC on-board power supply. 8-line Analog Line Circuit Card for Single Line Telephones Loop resistance : Max. 600 ohms (including telephone set) Provides Message Waiting Lamp control, momentary open functions for each circuit. 2-line Loop Dial Trunk Card Line resistance: Max. 2500 ohms (including internal resistance of the distant ofce equipment) Equipped with 48V DC-DC on-board power supply. V.35 Data Terminal Equipment Interface Card Used together with the PN-2DPCB card to provide the V.35 interface. Optical Interface Card Provides internal optical modem to T1/E1 network or Remote PIM. Line length : 10km or less Line coding : CMI
Continued on next page

PN-4LCV [For Brazil] PN-4LCW [For Brazil]

LC LC

PN-8LCAA

LC

PN-2LDTA [For Australia/ Others] PN-M03

LDT

M03

PN-M10

M10

24
90013-11

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION

Line/Trunk Card Name and Function EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL NAME NAME


PN-2ODTA ODT

FUNCTION
2-line Out Band Dialling Trunk Card Used as either a 2-wire E&M trunk or a 4-wire E&M trunk. Equipped with 48V DC-DC on-board power supply. Both No. 0 and No. 1 circuits must be set to the same purpose (2-wire or 4-wire) in one card. 2-line Out Band Dialling Trunk Card Used as either a 2-wire E&M trunk or a 4-wire E&M trunk. Equipped with 48V DC-DC on-board power supply. Both No. 0 and No. 1 circuits must be set to the same purpose (2-wire or 4-wire) in one card. 8-line PB Receiver Card Used for a PB station line, DID or tie line. 2-line Tone/Music Source Interface Card Used for BGM or Music on Hold. Provides two jacks for an external tone/music source. 4-channel CODEC Card for IP Trunk Voice compression protocols: G723.1, G729/G729A, G711, FAX (14.4kbps), DTMF signals Used together with PN-IPTB card. 8-line Power Failure Transfer Card To be mounted in PFT slot of PIM. One card per PIM. 4-port Voice Mail Card (NEAXMail AD-8) One card per system. Number of ports : 4 ports (Up to 8 ports when PZ-VM01 is mounted) Occupies three physical slots width per card. To be mounted in LT00 slot of PIM. 4-port Voice Mail Extension Card To be mounted on PZ-VM00-M.

PN-2ODTB [For N.Z.]

ODT

PN-8RSTA PN-TNTA

PBR TNT

PN-4VCTI

VCT

PZ-8PFTB

PFT

PZ-VM00/ PZ-VM00-M

VM

PZ-VM01

VM

25

Rev.1.1 90013-11

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


LINE CONDITIONS OF EACH TERMINAL

LINE CONDITIONS OF EACH TERMINAL


The cable length between the DLC card and terminal varies depending on the type of terminal. This table shows the line conditions of each Dterm , DSS/BLF Console, and Attendant Console.

Line Conditions of Each Terminal


NOTE1: The value in the [ ] shows the cable length when local power is supplied. NOTE2: When using PN-8DLCL or PN-8DLCP card, it is not available long line function, even if Dterm is equipped with Long Line Adapter.

TERMINAL TYPE
Dterm75 (Series E) (8 button)

CARD TYPE
PN-8DLCL/8DLCP (STANDARD) PN-4DLCM/4DLCQ (STANDARD) PN-2DLCB/2DLCN (LONG)

CABLE LENGTH (Cable 0.5/24 AWG)


300m (984ft. ) 300m (984ft. ) [1200m (3937ft.)] 850m (2788ft. ) [1200m (3937ft.)] 200m (656ft. ) 200m (656ft. ) [1200m (3937ft.)] 850m (2788ft. ) [1200m (3937ft.)] 200m (656ft. ) 200m (656ft. ) [1200m (3937ft.)] 850m (2788ft. ) [1200m (3937ft.)]

REMARKS
NOTE2

Dterm75 (Series E) (16 button)

PN-8DLCL/8DLCP (STANDARD) PN-4DLCM/4DLCQ (STANDARD) PN-2DLCB/2DLCN (LONG)

NOTE2

Dterm75 (Series E) (32 button)

PN-8DLCL/8DLCP (STANDARD) PN-4DLCM/4DLCQ (STANDARD) PN-2DLCB/2DLCN (LONG)[

NOTE2

Continued on next page

26

Rev.1.1 90026-11

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


LINE CONDITIONS OF EACH TERMINAL

Line Conditions of Each Terminal CABLE LENGTH (Cable 0.5/4 AWG)


300m (984ft.) 300m (984ft. ) [1200m (3937ft.)] 850m (2788ft. ) [1200m (3937ft.)] 150m (492ft. ) 150m (492ft. ) [1200m (3937ft.)] 850m (2788ft. ) [1200m (3937ft.)] 300m (984ft. ) 300m (984ft. ) 850m (2788ft. ) 300m ( 984ft. ) 1200m (3937ft.)
Continued on next page

TERMINAL TYPE
Dterm65 (Series III) (8 button)

CARD TYPE
PN-8DLCL/8DLCP (STANDARD) PN-4DLCM/4DLCQ (STANDARD) PN-2DLCB/2DLCN (LONG)

REMARKS
NOTE2

Dterm65 (Series III) (24 button)

PN-8DLCL/8DLCP (STANDARD) PN-4DLCM/4DLCQ (STANDARD) PN-2DLCB/2DLCN (LONG)

NOTE2

DSS/BLF Console NOTE3

PN-8DLCL/8DLCP (STANDARD) PN-4DLCM/4DLCQ (STANDARD) PN-2DLCB/2DLCN (LONG)

NOTE2

SN610 ATTCON PN-4DLCF (4-wire type ATTCON) (STANDARD) PN-2DLCC (LONG)

NOTE3: The DSS/BLF Console requires local AC/DC power supply.

27

Rev.1.1 90026-11

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


LINE CONDITIONS OF EACH TERMINAL

Line Conditions of Each Terminal CABLE LENGTH (Cable 0.5/24 AWG)


150m (492ft. ) 150m (492ft. ) 600m (1968ft. ) 300m (984ft. )

TERMINAL TYPE

CARD TYPE

REMARKS

PN-8DLCL/8DLCP SN708/709/712/741 (STANDARD) ATTCON (2-wire type ATTCON) PN-4DLCM/4DLCQ (STANDARD) PN-2DLCB/2DLCN (LONG) SN716 DESKCON PN-8DLCL/8DLCP and PN-PW00 or AC Adapter PN-4DLCM/4DLCQ and PN-PW00 or AC Adapter

450m (1476ft. )

28

Rev.1.1 90026-11

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARD

MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARD


This section explains the conditions for mounting circuit cards used in the system.

Circuit Card Mounting Slots


The gure below shows circuit card mounting slots allocated in the PIM based on circuit card type.

Circuit Card Mounting Slots


LT01/AP01 LT02/AP02 LT03/AP03 LT04/AP04 LT05/AP05 LT06/AP06 LT07/AP07 LT08/AP08 LT09/AP09 LT10/AP10 LT11/AP11/FP11 MP12/FP12 PFT VM LT00/AP00

AC/DC PWR

*1
LTC1 LTC0 BWB

*2
LTC2

*3 *4
LTC3

*5

DC/DC PWR

FRONT

LT00-LT11 : Line/Trunk card mounting slots AP00-AP11 : Application Processor card mounting slots MP : PN-CP14 mounting slot FP : PN-CP15 mounting slots

VM PFT AC/DC PWR DC/DC PWR

: : : :

PZ-VM00-M mounting slot PZ-8PFTB mounting slot PZ-PW121/PW126 mounting slot PZ-PW122 mounting slot

*1 PZ-VM00-M card is to be mounted in LT00 slot to use VM slot. *2 Either line/trunk cards or application processor cards can be mounted in LT00/AP00LT10/AP10 slots. *3 Either PN-CP15 or a line/trunk card or an application processor card is to be mounted in LT11/AP11/FP11 slot according to the system conguration. *4 PN-CP14 or PN-CP15 card is to be mounted in MP12/FP12 slot according to the system conguration. *5 PZ-8PFTB card is to be mounted in PFT slot.

29

Rev.1.1 90029-11

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARD

Mountable slots according to the number of ports The PIM can mount 8-port circuit cards. Available slots are dened by the number of ports of the circuit card.
00 V M 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 P F T

8-port circuit cards are mountable

See below.*

4-port circuit cards are mountable

* In slot 08-11, 8-port circuit cards are not mountable. The number of physical ports which can be provided by slot 08-11 depends on the number of ports of the circuit cards mounted in slot 04-07.

MOUNTING CIRCUIT CARDS IN SLOT04-07

MOUNTABLE CIRCUIT CARDS IN SLOT08-11

8-port circuit cards such Any application processor cards Such as; as; PN-AP00-A, PN-AP00-B, PN-AP01, PN-BRTA, PN-2BRTC, PN-8COT, PN-8DLC, PN-2BRTK, PN-CC01, PN-24DTA-C, PN-30DTC-A, PN-IPTA, PN-8LC, PN-8RSTA, PN-M03, PN-24PRTA, PN-4RSTB, PN-4RSTC, PN-SC01, PN-4DAT, PN-CFTB, PN-SC02, PN-SC03, PN-SC03-A PN-2CSI, PN-2ILC 4-port circuit cards 4-port line/trunk cards or any application processor cards

30

Rev.1.1 90029-11

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARD

Control Card Mounting Conditions


(1) PN-CP14 (MP) Mount the PN-CP14 card in the MP slot (slot 12) of PIM0. PN-CP15 (FP) When the system is congured with three PIMs or more, mount one PN-CP15 card in the FP slot (PIM0: slot 11, PIM2, 4, 6: slot 12) of PIM0, PIM2, PIM4, and PIM6. When the system is congured with one or two PIMs, the PN-CP15 card needs not to be mounted.

(2)

MP/FP Card Mounting Slots

PIM3

PIM7

PIM2

F P 12

F P 12

PIM6

PIM1

PIM5

PIM0

F M P P 11 12

F P 12

PIM4

31
90029-11

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARD

Application Processor Card Mounting Conditions


(1) System Capacity for Application Processor Card Max. 24 cards per system Max. 256 ports per system Mounting Application Processor Cards in PIM0 Use slots AP00 to AP11 to mount application processor cards in PIM0. AP11 Slot (FP11 slot) of PIM0 is not available for application processor if the system is congured with three or more PIMs, as this slot is used to mount FP card for that conguration.

(2)

Application Processor Card Mounting Slots (PIM0)

AP01

AP02

AP03

AP04

AP05

AP06

AP07

AP08

AP09

AP10

AP11/FP11

MP12

PFT

VM

AP00

AC/DC PWR PIM 0

*1
LTC1 LTC0 BWB LTC2

*2
LTC3

DC/DC PWR

FRONT

*1 Application processor cards can be mounted in AP00 to AP10 slots. *2 AP11 slot is available for application processor cards only when the system is congured with two or less PIMs.

32
90029-11

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARD

(3)

Mounting Application Processor Cards in PIM1-7 Use slots AP00 to AP11 to mount application processor cards in PIM1 through 7.

Application Processor Card Mounting Slots (PIM1-7)

AP01

AP02

AP03

AP04

AP05

AP06

AP07

AP08

AP09

AP10

AP11

FP12

PFT

VM

AP00

PIM 1-7

AC/DC PWR

*1
LTC1 LTC0 BWB LTC2 LTC3

DC/DC PWR

FRONT

*1 Application processor cards can be mounted in AP00 to AP11 slots.

33
90029-11

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARD

(4)

Mounting Conditions of Each Card

CARD NAME
PN-PW00 PN-CC01 PN-BRTA PN-2BRTC PN-2BRTK PN-24DTA-C PN-30DTC-A PN-24PRTA PZ-M542 PZ-M557

MOUNTING CONDITIONS
No circuit card can be mounted in the adjoining left side slot because one card occupies two physical slots width. Mount the PN-CC01 card in the slot that adjoins the PN-AP01 card, to connect both cards using cable (48-TW-0.3 CONN CA). Mount at least one card in PIM0 to receive source clock signals.

Mount the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card into any LTC connector of PIM BWB. Max. two cards can be mounted per PIM as follows: LTC0 and LTC2 LTC0 and LTC3 LTC1 and LTC3

34

Rev.1.1 90029-11

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARD

Line/Trunk Card Mounting Conditions


(1) System Capacity for Line/Trunk Card Max. 64 ports per PIM Max. 512 ports per system Mounting Line/Trunk Cards in PIM0 Use slots LT00 to LT11 to mount line/trunk cards in PIM0. LT11 slot (FP11 slot) of PIM0 is not available for line/trunk cards if the system is congured with three or more PIMs, as this slot is used to mount FP card for that conguration.

(2)

Line/Trunk Card Mounting Slots (PIM0)

LT01

LT02

LT03

LT04

LT05

LT06

LT07

LT08

LT09

LT10

LT11/FP11

MP12

PFT

VM

LT00

AC/DC PWR PIM0

*1 *2
LTC1 LTC0 BWB LTC2

*3
LTC3

DC/DC PWR

FRONT

*1 8-port Line/Trunk cards can be mounted in LT00 to LT07 slots. *2 4-port Line/Trunk cards can be mounted in LT00 to LT10 slots. *3 LT11 slot is available for 4-port line/trunk cards only when the system is congured with two or less PIMs.

35
90029-11

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION


MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARD

(3)

Mounting Line/Trunk Cards in PIM1-7 Use slots LT00 to LT11 to mount line/trunk cards in PIM1 through 7.

Line/Trunk Card Mounting Slots (PIM1-7)

LT01

LT02

LT03

LT04

LT05

LT06

LT07

LT08

LT09

LT10

LT11

FP12

PFT

VM

LT00

PIM 1-7

AC/DC PWR

*1 *2
LTC1 LTC0 BWB LTC2 LTC3

DC/DC PWR

FRONT

*1 8-port Line/Trunk cards can be mounted in LT00 to LT07 slots. *2 4-port Line/Trunk cards can be mounted in LT00 to LT11 slots.

36
90029-11

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION

This chapter explains how to install the PBX and the peripheral equipment, system initialization and data entry, and operation test procedures you should follow after completing the installation.

PRECAUTIONS ......................................................................... PROCEDURE ............................................................................ UNPACKING .............................................................................. WIRING AC CABLE TO TERMINALS ...................................... INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT .................................. POWER CABLE CONNECTION ............................................... SUPPLY VOLTAGE CHECK AND HEAT RUN TEST .............. BATTERY CONNECTION ......................................................... CABLE RUNNING TO MDF ...................................................... TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF ..................................... INSTALLATION OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT .................... MOUNTING CIRCUIT CARDS .................................................. SYSTEM INITIALIZATION ......................................................... SYSTEM DATA ENTRY ............................................................ OPERATION TEST .................................................................... SYSTEM DATA SAVE ............................................................... CLEANING AND VISUAL CHECK ............................................

38 45 49 50 54 83 90 94 102 109 128 199 201 202 204 205 205

37
90037-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
PRECAUTIONS

PRECAUTIONS
Grounding Requirements
The system grounding must have a specic ground resistance and AC noise level, and is to be connected to a predetermined terminal in the PBX. Standard grounding requirements are as shown below: Communication grounding : Less than 10 ohm Protective ground for PIM : Less than 10 ohm NOTE: The AC ripple on these various grounds should be less than 0.5Vp-p.

CAUTION
Grounding circuit continuity is vital for safe operation of telecommunication equipment. Never operate this equipment with the grounding conductor disconnected.

The following specic requirements apply to ground wiring. An equipment grounding conductor that is at least as large as the ungrounded branchsupply conductors is to be installed as part of the circuit that supplies the PBX. Bare, covered, or insulated grounding conductors are acceptable. Individually covered or insulated equipment grounding conductors shall have a continuous outer nish that is either green, or green with one or more yellow stripes. The equipment grounding connector is to be connected to ground at the service equipment. The attachment-plug receptacles in the vicinity of the PBX are all to be of a grounding type, and the equipment grounding conductors serving these receptacles are to be connected to earth ground at the service equipment.

38
90038-11

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
PRECAUTIONS

Static Electricity Guard


You must wear a grounded wrist strap to protect circuit cards from static electricity.

Static Electricity Guard


WHEN PLUGGING/UNPLUGGING A CIRCUIT CARD
PBX

FRAME GROUND SCREW WRIST STRAP

WHEN HOLDING A CIRCUIT CARD


NEVER TOUCH THE COMPONENTS OR SOLDERED SURFACE WITH BARE HANDS.

CARD FRONT

Continued on next page

39
90038-11

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
PRECAUTIONS

Static Electricity Guard


WHEN MAKING A SWITCH SETTING ON A CIRCUIT CARD

CIRCUIT CARD WEAR A WRIST STRAP AND PERFORM THE WORK ON A GROUNDED CONDUCTIVE WORK SURFACE.

WHEN CARRYING A CIRCUIT CARD


CONDUCTIVE POLYETHYLENE BAG WHEN CARRYING A CIRCUIT CARD AROUND, KEEP THE CARD IN A CONDUCTIVE POLYETHYLENE BAG.

CIRCUIT CARD

40
90038-11

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
PRECAUTIONS

Procedure for Unplugging/Plugging Circuit Cards


When removing a circuit card from the PIM or when mounting a circuit card in the PIM, follow the procedure given below.

Procedure for Unplugging/Plugging Circuit Cards PROCEDURE PLUG UNPLUG

CIRCUIT CARD
PN-CP14 (MP) PZ-PW121 (AC/DC PWR) PZ-PW126 (AC/DC PWR) PZ-PW122 (DC/DC PWR) PZ-M537 (EXTMEM)

CONDITION

(1) Power off (1) Power off These circuit cards must be plugged in or unplugged only (2) Unplug with power off to prevent dam(2) Plug in age to the card or other system (3) Power on (3) Power on circuitry. (1) Power off (1) Power off These circuit cards must be or MB or MB plugged in or unplugged under switch on switch on Make Busy condition or power off to prevent damage to the (2) Plug in (2) Unplug card or other system circuitry. (3) Power on (3) Power on or MB switch off

PN-AP00-A (DBM) PN-AP00-B (AP00) PN-AP01 (AP01) PN-BRTA (BRT) PN-2BRTC (BRT) PN-2BRTK (BRT) PN-CP15 (FP) PN-DAIA (DAI) PN-DAIB (DAI) PN-DAIC (DAI) PN-DAID (DAI) PN-DAIE (DAI) PN-DAIF (DAI) PN-24DTA-C (DTI) PN-30DTC-A (DTI) PN-IPTB (IPT) PN-24PRTA (PRT) PN-PW00 (EXTPWR) PN-4RSTB (MFR) PN-4RSTC (CIR) PN-SC00 (CCH) PN-SC01 (DCH) PN-SC03 (ICH) PN-SC03-A (CSH) PZ-M542 (CONN) PZ-M557 (CONN) PZ-VM00/ PZ-VM00-M (VM) PZ-VM01 (VM)

41

Rev.1.1 90038-11

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
PRECAUTIONS

CAUTION
You must hold the edge of a circuit card when plugging or unplugging the circuit card. If you touch another area, you may be exposed to hazard voltages.
PBX

NEVER TOUCH THE COMPONENTS OR SOLDERED SURFACE WITH BARE HANDS.

CARD FRONT

42
90038-11

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
PRECAUTIONS

Turning Power ON

CAUTION
1. When the operating power is being supplied to the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card, do not plug/ unplug this circuit card into/from its mounting slot. 2. When the system is congured with two or more PIMs, the BUS cable is providing gang control for the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card of PIM0 and other PIMs. Therefore, if the power of PIM0 is off, no power is supplied to the whole system even when the power switch(es) of other PIMs are left on. Note, however, that the battery charging is continuing even under these circumstances. 3. Do not turn off the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card on PIM1 to PIM7 when the system is operating.

(1)

Check the switch position of each PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card before turning power on. Make sure that the AC120V/240V selector switch is positioned to appropriate voltage for each country (AC120V or AC240V). NOTE: PZ-PW126 card does not have this switch.
SW2 100V/120V 240V

Make sure that the battery mode selector switch is positioned as shown below to meet the kind of battery:
SW101 OFF 1 : Not used 1 2 : ON (SEAL/FLOAT2) 2 ON OFF (OPEN/FLOAT1)

(2)

Turn the SW1 switches of all the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 cards to ON. First, turn ON PIM1 to PIM7. Then, turn ON PIM0 last of all.

43

Rev.1.1 90038-11

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
PRECAUTIONS

Turning Power OFF


(1) Before turning power off; make sure that all line/trunk cards are not operating by no busy lamps indication. Turn the SW1 switches of all the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 cards to OFF. First, turn OFF PIM0. Then, turn OFF PIM1 to PIM7.

(2)

44

Rev.1.1 90038-11

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
PROCEDURE

PROCEDURE
This owchart explains the procedures for installing the PBX system. You should follow the procedure shown below.

Procedure Flowchart
START

UNPACKING

page 49

WIRING AC CABLE TO TERMINALS

page 50

INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

page 54

POWER CABLE CONNECTION

page 83

SUPPLY VOLTAGE CHECK AND HEAT RUN TEST

page 90

BATTERY CONNECTION

page 94

CABLE RUNNING TO MDF

page 102

TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

page 109

INSTALLATION OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

page 128
REFER TO CHAPTER 3

SWITCH SETTINGS OF CIRCUIT CARDS

page 207

Continued on next page

45
90045-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
PROCEDURE

Procedure Flowchart
A

MOUNTING CIRCUIT CARDS

page 199 page 201 page 202 page 204 page 205 page 205

SYSTEM INITIALIZATION

SYSTEM DATA ENTRY

OPERATION TEST

SYSTEM DATA SAVE

CLEANING AND VISUAL CHECK

MOUNTING FRONT COVER

END

For Floor Standing Installation, there are three kinds of method to install the equipment. It depends on the country according to the UL/cUL/ACA. NOTE: UL = Underwriters Laboratories (U.S.A.) cUL = Canadian Underwriters Laboratories (Canada) ACA = Australian Communication Authority (Australia)

Stationary Equipment (For North America/ Australia) Fixed Equipment (For North America/ Australia) Fixed Equipment (For Other Countries) See next page.

46
90045-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
PROCEDURE

Stationary Equipment (For North America/Australia)


The equipment is placed on the BASE TRAY which is xed on the oor, and is connected to 120V/ 240V AC Power Source using AC CORD-D cable. For installation of Stationary Equipment, see the following pages. WIRING AC CABLE TO TERMINALS - Using AC CORD-D page 50 INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT - Floor Marking for BASE TRAY page 58 - Installation of Module, For Stationary Equipment page 55

Fixed Equipment (For North America/Australia)


The equipment is xed on the oor by BASE PLATE and anchor bolts, and is connected to AC Power Distribution Board using installation cable. For installation of this equipment, see the following pages. WIRING AC CABLE TO TERMINALS - Using installation Cable page 52 INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT - Floor Marking for BASE PLATE page 58 - Installation of Module, For Fixed Equipment page 55

Fixed Equipment (For Other Countries)


The equipment is xed on the oor by BASE PLATE and anchor bolts, and is connected to 120V/ 240V AC Power Source using AC CORD-D cable. For installation of this equipment, see the following pages. WIRING AC CABLE TO TERMINALS - Using AC CORD-D page 50 INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT - Floor Marking for BASE PLATE page 58 - Installation of Module, For Fixed Equipment page 55

47
90045-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
PROCEDURE

The mark shown below is attached to each procedure in which circuit cards are handled. When doing such a procedure, the installer must perform the procedure with caution, to prevent damage caused by static electricity (See Static Electricity Guard page 39).

ATTENTION
Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required

48
90045-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
UNPACKING

UNPACKING
ATTENTION
Contents Static Sensitive
Handling Precautions Required

(1)

Check the received quantity of packages containing the PBX system with the description on the shipping document. Check the packaging for external damage done by transportation and record it as necessary. Unpack the packaging. For unpacking the packages containing circuit cards, a grounded wrist strap should be worn.

(2)

(3)

(4) (5)

Check the quantity of equipment and materials unpacked with the shipping document. Perform visual inspection, checking for the following items. Modules Overall distortion. Scratches and dents on the surface. Scratches and cracks on the PIM Backplane. Broken or bent pins on the PIM Backplane. Covers Circuit Cards Scratches and dents. Overall distortion Scratches and cracks Loss, or damage of parts on the circuit cards. Attendant Console Scratches and cracks on the keyboard Overall distortion Damage to Keys and lamps.

49
90049-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
WIRING AC CABLE TO TERMINALS

WIRING AC CABLE TO TERMINALS


There are two kinds of AC cable : AC CORD-D For Stationary Equipment/Fixed Equipment (For Other Countries) : Installation Cable For Fixed Equipment (For North America/ Australia)

Using AC CORD-D
(1) Take the AC CORD-D out of the hole on the left side of the BASE, then secure the code to the BASE with the cord bush. NOTE: Cord bush is attached to the AC CORD-D. Wire the AC CORD-D and the FG cable to the FG, NEUTRAL, LINE and Ground terminals on the BASE. Wire the AC CORD-B to the FG, NEUTRAL and LINE terminals on the BASE.
Continued on next page

(2) (3)

Wiring AC CORD to Terminals


NOTE: Cable colors in the parentheses are for Australia.
BASE

TO CN1 on PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 in PIM FG CABLE AC CORD-B (GREEN) WHITE (BLUE) BLACK (BROWN)

GREEN (GREEN/YELLOW)

TERMINAL BLOCKS

FG TO 120V/240V AC POWER SOURCE

NEUTRAL

LINE

BLACK (BROWN) WHITE (BLUE) GREEN (GREEN/YELLOW) AC CORD-D

HOW TO SECURE CABLES TO TERMINAL BLOCK


1 3 1 INSERT A SCREW DRIVER INTO THE INSIDE HOLE OF TERMINAL BLOCK. 2 PULL DOWN THE SCREW DRIVER TOWARD INSIDE AND OPEN THE METAL PLATE. 3 INSERT A POWER CABLE INTO THE OUTSIDE HOLE OF TERMINAL BLOCK. 4 REMOVE THE SCREW DRIVER.

FRONT

50

Rev.1.1 90050-11

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
WIRING AC CABLE TO TERMINALS

(4)

When the system is two-frame conguration, the AC CORD-D of the right side frame can go through the BASE of the left side frame.

AC CORD Wiring for Two-Frame Conguration


TO 120V/240V AC POWER SOURCE

AC CORD-D

CORD BUSH

BASE

TERMINAL BLOCKS FG NEUTRAL LINE FG NEUTRAL LINE

51
90050-11

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
WIRING AC CABLE TO TERMINALS

Using Installation Cable


(1) Take the Installation cable out of the hole on the left side of the BASE, then secure the cable to the BASE with the cord bush. NOTE: The installer is to use minimum 16AWG (1.3 ohm) size wire, maximum 9mm size cable. Wire the Installation cable and the FG cable to the FG, NEUTRAL, LINE and Ground terminals on the BASE. Wire the AC CORD-B to the FG, NEUTRAL and LINE terminals on the BASE.
Continued on next page

(2) (3)

Wiring Installation Cable to Terminals


NOTE: Cable colors in the parentheses are for Australia.
BASE

TO CN1 on PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 in PIM FG CABLE AC CORD-B (GREEN) WHITE (BLUE) BLACK (BROWN)

GREEN (GREEN/YELLOW)

TERMINAL BLOCKS

FG TO AC POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARD

NEUTRAL

LINE

BLACK (BROWN) WHITE (BLUE) GREEN (GREEN/YELLOW) INSTALLATION CABLE

HOW TO SECURE CABLES TO TERMINAL BLOCK


1 3 1 INSERT A SCREW DRIVER INTO THE INSIDE HOLE OF TERMINAL BLOCK. 2 PULL DOWN THE SCREW DRIVER TOWARD INSIDE AND OPEN THE METAL PLATE. 3 INSERT A POWER CABLE INTO THE OUTSIDE HOLE OF TERMINAL BLOCK. 4 REMOVE THE SCREW DRIVER.

FRONT

52

Rev.1.1 90050-11

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
WIRING AC CABLE TO TERMINALS

(4)

When the system is two-frame conguration, the Installation cable of the right side frame can go through the BASE of the left side frame.

Installation Cable Wiring for Two-Frame Conguration


TO AC POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARD

INSTALLATION CABLE

CORD BUSH

BASE

TERMINAL BLOCKS FG NEUTRAL LINE FG NEUTRAL LINE

53
90050-11

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT


Floor Standing Installation
Start

Checkup before installation

Check the site for installing the PBX with the work drawing to verify that the required oor space is ensured and that service entrances and ducts for trunk/extension cables, power cables and bus cables have been properly worked at correct positions. See Floor Space and Cable Hole Location. page 56, page 57 Mark positions for installation of the PBX main equipment. For Fixed Equipment, detach the BASE PLATE from the BASE. See Floor Marking for BASE PLATE. page 58 For Stationary Equipment, see Floor Marking for BASE TRAY. page 58 NOTE: Measure the level of the floor surface before installing the PBX main equipment. Check the level of the oor. If necessary, adjust the level by inserting spacers beneath the equipment. First open necessary number of preliminary prepared holes using the drill bit for small-diameter holes, then use the nishing drill bit for nishing drill holes. See Drilling. page 59 Detach the front cover of each Module. See Detaching FRONT COVER. page 60
Continued on next page

Marking

Leveling

Drilling

Detaching Front Cover

54
90054-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Installation of Module

For Fixed Equipment (1) Fix the BASE PLATE to the oor with anchor bolts. (2) Fix the BASE to the BASE PLATE with screws. See Connection of BASE and BASE PLATE. page 63 (3) Fix the Module onto the BASE with screws. See Connection of Module and BASE. page 64 For Stationary Equipment (1) Fix the BASE TRAY to the oor with anchor bolts. (2) Fix the Module onto the BASE with screws. See Connection of Module and BASE. page 64 (3) Place the Module and the BASE on the BASE TRAY. See Placing Module on BASE TRAY. page 65 Connect Modules with screws. See Connection of Modules. page 66 Install the I/F BRACKET to the top-stack PIMs if the equipment is stacked with ve or more Modules. See Installation of I/F BRACKET. page 69 Install the TOP COVER to the top-stack PIM. See Installation of TOP COVER. page 70 Install the MOUNTING BRACKET to the top-stack PIM if the equipment is stacked with four or more Modules. See Installation of MOUNTING BRACKET. page 71 Carefully review every step above to check that all necessary screws have been properly placed and tightened.

Installation of Multiple-Module

Installation of Top Cover

Installation of Mounting Bracket

Checking

End

55
90054-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Floor Space
UNIT : mm (inch)

223 (8.8) 430 (16.9) 200 (7.9)

1000 (39.4) MAINTENANCE AREA

200 (7.9)

PIM/BATTM

BASE

FRONT

56
90054-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Cable Hole Location

MODULE

BASE

FRONT

: CABLE HOLE

57
90054-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Floor Marking for BASE PLATE (for Fixed Equipment)


Using MOUNTING BRACKET : 10 (0.4) Not Using MOUNTING BRACKET : 1.7 (0.1) UNIT : mm (inch) (WALL)

(1.6)

40.6

202.6 30 (1.2) 347.2 (13.7)

(5.0)

ANCHOR BOLT x 4

(1.3)

34

30 (1.2) 347.2 (13.7) 412.4 (16.2)

Floor Marking for BASE TRAY (for Stationary Equipment)


UNIT : mm (inch) ANCHOR BOLT x 4

(5.0)

128

(1.8)

45

43.9 (1.7)

58
90054-10

(7.9)

128

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Drilling (1) Make a preliminary hole in the concrete, using a drill bit for small-diameter holes. (2) Drill a hole in the concrete with a drill suitable for a plug bolt a little deeper than the plug bolt length. Anchor Bolt Size : 10mm (0.39inch) DIA for Fixed Equipment 6mm (0.24inch) DIA for Stationary Equipment (3) Insert the anchor bolt into the hole. (4) Push anchor bolt until the bolt stays permanently in place. (5) Turn bolt counterclockwise and remove. (6) Insert bolts correctly into the holes for equipment installation, then tighten them properly.

Drilling Instructions for Anchor Bolt


(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

59
90054-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Detaching FRONT COVER (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Push portion A of the COVER PARTS to release the RATCH. Pivot the COVER PARTS on its left side to remove it. Loosen its one screw. Lift up the STOPPER to unlock. Pivot the FRONT COVER on its bottom to remove it.

Detaching FRONT COVER


(1) PUSH COVER PARTS.

COVER PARTS

PUSH

PORTION A

(2)

REMOVE COVER PARTS.

Continued on next page


60
90054-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

(3)

LOOSEN A SCREW.

(4)

LIFT UP STOPPER (UNLOCK).

Continued on next page

61
90054-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

(5)

REMOVE FRONT COVER.

62
90054-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Connection of BASE and BASE PLATE for Fixed Equipment (1) Mount the BASE on the BASE PLATE with hanging on the hooks. (2) Slide the BASE into the inner end. (3) Fix the BASE to the BASE PLATE with two screws. NOTE: Screws are attached to the BASE PLATE.

Connection of BASE and BASE PLATE

BASE

FRONT BASE PLATE

HOOKS

SLIDE BASE INTO INNER END.

BASE

BASE PLATE

63
90054-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Connection of Module and BASE for Fixed/Stationary Equipment (1) Mount the Module on the BASE with hanging on the hooks. (2) Slide the Module into the inner end. (3) Fix the Module to the BASE with three screws. NOTE: Screws are attached to the Module.

Connection of Module and BASE

SCREWS

BASE

HOOKS

MODULE

SLIDE MODULE INTO INNER END.


BASE

64
90054-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Placing Module on BASE TRAY for Stationary Equipment Place the Module and the BASE on the BASE TRAY.

Placing Module on BASE TRAY

BASE TRAY

65
90054-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Connection of Modules NOTE: The FRONT STOPPER, BUILD PLATES, and screws are attached to the Module.

(1) Insert the BUILD PLATES (R)/(L) into the slits of the SIDE FRAME, then slide them backward and lock them. (2) Place the FRONT STOPPER on the Module, then x it with three screws.
Continued on next page

Connection of BUILD PLATE


BUILD PLATE (R)

BUILD PLATE (L)

SIDE FRAME

66
90054-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Connection of FRONT STOPPER


FRONT STOPPER

PZ-PW121 SCREW

SCREW

PIM TOP FRAME

SCREW PIM SIDE FRAME

FRONT STOPPER

SCREWS

67
90054-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

(3) Hook the PIM onto the BUILD PLATEs nails. (4) Slide the PIM backward until it comes to the back end. (5) Fix the PIM with three screws.

Connection of Modules

SCREWS

68
90054-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Installation of I/F BRACKET Install the I/F BRACKET to the top-stack PIMs if the equipment is stacked with ve or more Modules. Fix the I/F BRACKET to rear side of top-stack PIMs with two screws from inside of PIMs. NOTE: Screws are attached to the I/F BRACKET.

FRONT SIDE SCREW

SCREW

I/F BRACKET

69
90054-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Installation of TOP COVER (1) Hang four hooks of the TOP COVER on the back board of PIM as shown below. (2) Fix the TOP COVER to the front side of the PIM with two screws. NOTE: Screws are attached to BASE/TOP ASSEM.

HOOK

70
90054-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Installation of MOUNTING BRACKET Install the MOUNTING BRACKET to the top-stack PIM if the equipment is stacked with four or more Modules. (1) Remove four screws located on the rear side of the top-stack PIM. (2) Fix the MOUNTING BRACKET to the PIM with the removed screws. (3) Fix the PIM to the wall or ceiling by using wires, chains and eyebolts (locally provided).

Installation of MOUNTING BRACKET


FRONT

PIM

SCREWS

MOUNTING BRACKET

71
90054-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Wall Mounting Installation


Start

Checkup before installation

Check the site for installing the PBX with the work drawing to verify that the required oor space is ensured and that service entrances and ducts for trunk/extension cables, power cables and grounding conductors have been properly worked at correct positions. See Floor Space and Cable Hole Location. page 56, page 57 Detach the front cover of each Module. See Detaching FRONT COVER. page 60 Mark hole positions for installation of the PBX main equipment. See Wall Marking for HANGER ASSEM. page 73 Secure the HANGER ASSEM to the wall. Hang the PIM to the HANGER ASSEM. See Hanging PIM to HANGER ASSEM. page 74 NOTE: The BATTM can not be installed on the wall. After hanging each PIM to the respective HANGER ASSEMs, connect PIMs using screws. See Connection of Modules. page 66 Carefully review every step above to check that all necessary screws have been properly placed and tightened.

Detaching Front Cover

Marking

Installation of Module

Multiple-Module Configuration

Checking

End

72
90054-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Wall Marking for HANGER ASSEM


167.5 (7.0) 167.5 (7.0) UNIT : mm (inch)

210.8

(8.3) (8.3) (8.3) (8.3) (8.3) (14.0) 356.5 (13.9) 352 (13.9) 352 (13.9) 352 (13.9) 352

ANCHOR/ SCREW (x 3/PIM)

BASE

73
90054-10

210.8

HANGER ASSEM

210.8

210.8

210.8

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Hanging PIM to HANGER ASSEM (1) Secure the HANGER ASSEM to the surface of a wall with three screws. Select screws to match with the wall type as follows.
WALL TYPE
CONCRETE WOOD PLASTER BOARD [THICKNESS Min. 9.6mm (0.38inch)]

RECOMMENDED SCREW
ANCHOR BOLT TYPE WOOD TYPE SCREWS MOLLY ANCHOR TYPE Recommended 4mm (0.16inch) by 25mm (0.98inch) Min. 3.5mm (0.14inch) DIA Max. 4.5mm (0.17inch) DIA Min. 3.5mm (0.14inch) DIA Max. 4.5mm (0.17inch) DIA

A concrete wall is recommended because it is the most rm to mount the PBX of the three. The plaster board is the most inrm wall of the three. (2) Hang the slits of the rear of a PIM to the hooks of the HANGER ASSEM. (3) Secure the PIM to the HANGER ASSEM with two screws. NOTE: Screws are attached to the HANGER ASSEM.

Hanging PIM to HANGER ASSEM

HANGER ASSEM HOOK

HOOK

PIM

BASE SCREWS

FRONT

74
90054-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

19-inch Rack Mounting Installation


Start

Checkup before installation

Check the site for installing the PBX with the work drawing to verify that the required oor space is ensured and that service entrances and ducts for trunk/extension cables, power cables and grounding conductors have been properly worked at correct positions. See Floor Space and Cable Hole Location. page 56, page 57 Detach the SIDE COVER and SIDE PANEL of the Module for 19RACK BRACKET (A) mounting. For 19RACK BRACKET (B), this procedure is not required. See Detaching SIDE COVER/SIDE PANEL. page 76 Mount the 19RACK BRACKET (A) to the PIM. See Connection of 19RACK BRACKET (A). page 78 Mount the PIM with the 19RACK BRACKET (A) to the 19-inch RACK. See Mounting PIM to 19-inch RACK. page 79 Mount the 19RACK BRACKET (B) to the bottom-stack Module. See Connection of 19RACK BRACKET (B). page 80 Mount the 19RACK BRACKET (A) to the top-stack PIM. See Connection of 19RACK BRACKET (A). page 78 Mount the modules with the 19 RACK BRACKET (A) and (B) to the 19inch RACK. See Mounting Multiple-Module to 19-inch RACK. page 81 Carefully review every step above to check that all necessary screws have been properly placed and tightened.

Detaching Side Cover/Side Panel

One PIM Configuration

Multiple-Module Configuration

Checking

End

75
90054-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Detaching SIDE COVER/SIDE PANEL (1) Remove the two screws xing the SIDE COVER. (2) Pivot the SIDE COVER on its bottom to remove it. (3) Remove the SIDE PANEL xed by three screws, from the left side ame of the PIM.

Detaching SIDE COVER

SCREW

SIDE COVER

76
90054-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Detaching SIDE PANEL

SCREWS

SIDE PANEL

77
90054-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Connection of 19RACK BRACKET (A) (1) Insert the nails of the 19RACK BRACKET (A) into the side frame of the Module. (2) Secure them with four screws each. NOTE: Screws are attached to the 19RACK BRACKET (A).

Connection of 19RACK BRACKET (A)


19RACK BRACKET (A)

SCREWS

NAILS

78
90054-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Mounting PIM to 19-inch RACK (1) Mount the PIM with 19RACK BRACKET (A) into the 19-inch RACK. (2) Secure them with four screws (locally provided).

Mounting PIM to 19-inch Rack


SCREWS

19RACK BRACKET (A)

79
90054-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Connection of 19RACK BRACKET (B) (1) Place the BASE PLATE on the 19RACK BRACKET (B). (2) Secure the BASE PLATE with four washer and nuts. (3) Mount the BASE to the BASE PLATE. (See Connection of BASE and BASE PLATE. page 63) (4) Mount the Module to the BASE. (See Connection of Module and BASE. page 64) NOTE: Nuts and washers are attached to the 19RACK BRACKET (B).

Connection of 19RACK BRACKET (B)

NUT

WASHER 19RACK BRACKET (B)

BASE PLATE

80
90054-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

Mounting Multiple-Module to 19-inch RACK

19BRACKET (A)

19BRACKET (B)

81
90054-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

BUS Cable Connection


When the system is a multiple-PIM conguration, connect all the BUS Connector to each other using BUS cables, as shown below. Be sure to secure the BUS cables using tie wraps to avoid a PFT card.

BUS Cable
700mm (27.6inch)

48-TW-0.7 CONN CA

Connection of BUS Cables

TIE WRAP P W R P W R BUS CABLE

PIM3

PIM7

FRONT P W R P W R

PIM2

PIM6

PIM1

P W R

P W R

PIM5

PIM0

P W R

P W R

PIM4

48-TW-0.7 CONN CA

82
90054-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
POWER CABLE CONNECTION

POWER CABLE CONNECTION


The cable connections on the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card are shown below.

Cable Connection on PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126


NOTE1: Follow the Label on Front Plate of PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126. NOTE2: If GND (Signal GND) has to be separated from FG (Frame GND), remove the link between GND and FG terminals. NOTE3: PZ-PW126 card does not have SW2.

SW101 OFF 12 NOTE1 SW101 MJ MN ON CN103 TO PWR1 CONNECTOR ON BWB TO PWR0A CONNECTOR ON BWB CN104 TO PWR0B CONNECTOR ON BWB POWER OUTPUT CABLE (+5V, 27V, E) POWER OUTPUT CABLE (+90V, CR, E) PWR CNT CA-D (for PIM1 to PIM 7) PWR CNT CA-E (for PIM0)

ON 1: OFF: NO CONNECTION 2: ON: SEAL/FLOAT2 OFF: OPEN/FLOAT1

27V TO AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT FG

GND NOTE2

CAUTION
Set the appropriate voltage before turning on the SW1 switch.
PWR CA-A

TO OTHER PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 100V /120V 240V SW2 TO BATTERY OR OTHER PZ-PW121/ PZ-PW126

CN1

O I

SW1

PWR CA-A/BATT CA

TO FRAME GROUND TERMINAL IN PIM L N FG NOMINAL AC INPUT TO TERMINAL BLOCK ON BASE

AC CORD-B

83

Rev.1.1 90083-11

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
POWER CABLE CONNECTION

Connection of AC CORD-B
(1) (2) Connect the AC CORD-B to the CN1 connector on the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card. Screw the ground cable of the AC CORD-B to the frame ground terminal on the PIM.

Connection of AC CORD-B
PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 CN1 TO 120V/240V AC POWER SOURCE AC CORD-D CORD BUSH

BASE AC CORD-B FRONT TERMINAL BLOCKS

84

Rev.1.1 90083-11

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
POWER CABLE CONNECTION

Connection of DC Power Cable


(1) (2) Conrm the connection of power output cables, as shown below (These cables are preinstalled). For PIM0, connect the PWR CNT CA-E to the CN103 connector on the PZ-PW121/PZPW126 card and the PWR1 connector on the BWB. For PIM1 to PIM7, connect the PWR CNT CA-D to the CN103 connector on the PZ-PW121/ PZ-PW126 card and the PWR1 connector on the BWB.

PWR CNT CA-D/PWR CNT CA-E

250mm (9.8inch) 550mm (21.7inch)

300mm (11.8inch)

Cable Connection between PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 and BWB


PIM PZ-PW121 /PZ-PW126 PWR1 CN103 PWR0A PWR0B CARD SLOT AREA BWB (BACK WIRING BOARD)

PWR0C LTC CONNECTOR AREA

POWER OUTPUT CABLE (+5V, 27V, E) POWER OUTPUT CABLE (+90V, CR, E) PWR CNT CA-E (FOR PIM0) PWR CNT CA-D (FOR PIM1 TO PIM7)

85

Rev.1.1 90083-11

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
POWER CABLE CONNECTION

(3)

When you need 48V DC power supply for a Cell Station (Zone Transceiver) in WCS system, do the following procedure. If not, skip this procedure and go to (4). page 88

STEP 1: Attach four screws preliminary to the PZ-PW122 card. STEP 2: Mount the PZ-PW122 card into the PIM which accommodates the CSI cards, and fasten the screws. NOTE: Screws are attached to the PZ-PW122 card.

Mounting PZ-PW122 into PIM

PIM PZ-PW122

86
90083-11

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
POWER CABLE CONNECTION

STEP 3: Connect the PWR CNT CA-E or PWR CNT CA-D, and POWER OUTPUT CABLE (48V, E) as shown below.

Cable Connection between PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126/PZ-PW122 and BWB


PIM PZ-PW121 /PZ-PW126 PWR1 CN103 PWR0A PWR0B CARD SLOT AREA BWB (BACK WIRING BOARD)

PWR0C

LTC CONNECTOR AREA

PZ-PW122 POWER OUTPUT CABLE (+5V, 27V, E) POWER OUTPUT CABLE (48V, E) POWER OUTPUT CABLE (+90V, CR, E) PWR CNT CA-E (FOR PIM0) PWR CNT CA-D (FOR PIM1 TO PIM7)

87

Rev.1.1 90083-11

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
POWER CABLE CONNECTION

(4)

When the system is congured with two or more PIMs, connect the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 cards to each other using the PWR CA-A for power multi-connection.

PWR CA-A
550mm (21.7inch)

PWR CA-A

Connection of PWR CA-A Cables


(a) When using an Internal Battery

PWR PIM3

PWR CA-A

PWR

PWR CA-A PIM7

TO INTERNAL BATTERY PWR PWR

TO INTERNAL BATTERY

PIM2

PIM6 TO INTERNAL BATTERY PWR PWR TO INTERNAL BATTERY

PWR CA-A

PWR CA-A PIM5

PIM1

TO INTERNAL BATTERY

TO INTERNAL BATTERY

PWR

PWR

PIM0 TO INTERNAL BATTERY TO INTERNAL BATTERY

PIM4

88

Rev.1.1 90083-11

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
POWER CABLE CONNECTION

Connection of PWR CA-A Cables


(b) When using an External Battery

PWR PIM3

PWR

PIM7

PWR

PWR CA-A

PWR

PWR CA-A

PIM2

PIM6

PWR

PWR

PIM1

PIM5

PWR

PWR

PIM0

PIM4

TO EXTERNAL BATTERY

89
90083-11

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SUPPLY VOLTAGE CHECK AND HEAT RUN TEST

SUPPLY VOLTAGE CHECK AND HEAT RUN TEST


Precautions
(1) Check the switch position of each PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card before turning power on. Make sure that the AC120V/240V selector switch is positioned to appropriate voltage for each country (AC120V or AC240V). NOTE: PZ-PW126 does not have this switch.
SW2 100V/120V 240V

Make sure that the battery mode selector switch is positioned as shown below to meet the kind of battery:
SW101 OFF 1 : Not used 1 2 : ON (SEAL/FLOAT2) 2 ON OFF (OPEN/FLOAT1)

(2)

When the operating power is being supplied to the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card, do not plug/ unplug this circuit card into/from its mounting slot.

(3)

Immediately follow the instructions below if the MJ lamp on the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 lights up or smoke or nasty smell is produced during the test: a) Turn power off of all PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 cards. b) Unplug the AC code from the wall outlet. c) Carefully check for cause(s) of the failure occurring. NOTE: Do not turn power on again until the cause is detected. (4) When the system is congured with two or more PIMs, the BUS cable is providing gang control for the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card of PIM0 and other PIMs. Therefore, if the power of PIM0 is off, no power is supplied to the whole system even when the power switch(es) of other PIMs are left on. Note, however, that the battery charging is continuing even under these circumstances.

90

Rev.1.1 90090-11

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SUPPLY VOLTAGE CHECK AND HEAT RUN TEST

Power Routing
NOTE1: PN-4LCD/4LCF/4LCL/4LCW card provides +80V on-board power supply (+80VOBP). NOTE2: PN-AUCA, PN-2DLCB/PN-2DLCN, PN-2DLCC, PN-2LDTA, PN-2ODTA/2ODTB card provides 48V on-board power supply (48VOBP).

PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 TO PIM2

+5V 27V 27V AC CR +90V

PIM1

PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 PWR CA-A NOTE1 +5V +5V +80VOBP BATTERY 27V AC +90V NOTE2 5V +5V AC CORD-B 48VOBP 48V 27V CR PN-8LCAA +5V 27V 5V CR +90V 27V CR CR +80V PIM0 27V 5V

AC CORD-D TO AC MAINS INPUT TERMINAL BLOCKS BASE

91

Rev.1.1 90090-11

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SUPPLY VOLTAGE CHECK AND HEAT RUN TEST

Checking for Supply Voltage


Start Checking power cable and grounding conductor

Before connecting AC Cord, verify: - that the SW1 switch of the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card is positioned to OFF; - that the AC Cord is unplugged from the wall outlet. Use a tester to verify that the input power is AC12010V or AC24010V.

Testing for input power

Connecting AC power

Plug the AC cord into a wall outlet.

Turning power ON

Turn the SW1 switches of all the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 cards on PIM1 to PIM7 to ON. Then, turn the SW1 switch of the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card on PIM0 to ON last of all. Verify that the ON lamp on the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card lights up.

Verifying power pilot lamp ON

Testing for output voltage

Measure the output voltage: -20V should be observed at GND and 27V terminals of the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card. See Conrming Output Voltage. page 93

End

Heat Run Test


Turn the SW1 switch ON. Keep it on for 5 minutes to check for no abnormal voltage. After completing the test, turn OFF the SW1 switch of the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card on PIM0. Then, turn OFF the SW1 switches of all the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 cards.

92

Rev.1.1 90090-11

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SUPPLY VOLTAGE CHECK AND HEAT RUN TEST

Conrming Output Voltage


TESTER

DC100V

MJ MN ON

27V FG GND

SW1

O I

TO FRAME GROUND TERMINAL IN PIM TO TERMINAL BLOCK ON BASE

93
90090-11

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
BATTERY CONNECTION

BATTERY CONNECTION
WARNING
TURN OFF AC POWER BEFORE CONNECTING BATTERIES.

CAUTION
1. 24V batteries must be used in this system. 2. If battery terminals (+, ) contact with the module under connecting the battery cable to the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card, the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card or the BWB may be broken. Therefore, you must perform work in accordance with the following steps when mounting or removing the batteries. (1) When mounting batteries: (a) Connect the battery cable to the batteries. (b) Mount the batteries into the appointed position of the PIM or the BATTM. (c) Connect the battery cable to the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card. (2) When removing batteries: (a) Disconnect the battery cable from the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card. (b) Remove the batteries from the PIM or the BATTM.
Continued on next page

Recommended Battery Internal Battery: External Battery: (BATTM) YUASA MATSUSHITA YUASA MATSUSHITA type NPH-3.2-12 type LCR-12V3.4NE type NP-24-12B type LCL-12V-24

94

Rev.1.1 90094-11

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
BATTERY CONNECTION

CAUTION
3. Battery Replacement Table and Battery Warnings The label which shows battery replacement table and battery warnings is attached to the reverse side of Front Cover for PIM and BATTM. During the battery installation process, the warning statements must be observed. When replacing batteries, the battery replacement table should be observed in order to increase battery life and insure a safe operation.

PIM/BATTM LABEL

FRONT COVER

BATTERY REPLACEMENT TABLE INSTALLATION DATE: ,

CAUTION PAY ATTENTION TO THE FOLLOWING.

TO PREVENT INJURY AND SKIN BURN,

AMBIENT 5 ~ 35C 0 ~ 50C 0 ~ 50C TEMPERATURE (AVERAGE 25C) (AVERAGE 25C) (AVERAGE 40C) REPLACEMENT INTERVAL 3 YEARS 2 YEARS 1 YEAR

o ELECTROLYTE LEAKAGE OR OTHER HAZARDS MAY RESULT IF THE BATTERY IS NOT REPLACED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE SPECIFIED INTERVALS.

o DO NOT STRIKE A MATCH OR CAUSE A SPARK IN VICINITY OF BATTERY. o PLACE THE EQUIPMENT WELL VENTILATED AREA. o DO NOT SHORT. o REPLACE BATTERY ONLY AFTER BATTERY GASES HAVE BEEN DISPERSED.

95
90094-11

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
BATTERY CONNECTION

Internal Battery Connection


(1) (2) (3) (4) Connect the BATT CA INT cable to the batteries as shown below. Mount the battery unit (24V DC, 3.2-3.4AH) into the PIM. Plug the BATT CA INT connector into the BATT1 connector on the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card. Secure the batteries and battery cable using tie wraps.

Internal Battery Mounting


DIMENSION OF BATTERY 67mm (2.6inch) 60mm (2.4inch) PIM 134mm (5.3inch) Recommended Batteries Yuasa NPH-3.2-12 Matsushita LCR-12V 3.4NE TO BATT1 CONNECTOR ON PZ-PW121 /PZ-PW126

BATT CA INT

RED

+ +

BLUE/BLACK

BLACK INTERNAL BATTERY UNIT (24V DC, 3.2 TO 3.4AH)

Continued on next page

96

Rev.1.1 90094-11

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
BATTERY CONNECTION

Internal Battery Mounting

TIE WRAP

+ +

97
90094-11

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
BATTERY CONNECTION

(5)

When the system is congured with two or more PIMs, connect the BATT CA INT and the PWR CA-A as shown below.

Internal Battery Connection for Multiple-PIM Conguration


NOTE1: One Internal Battery unit (24V DC, 3.2-3.4AH) can be mounted in each PIM. NOTE2: Internal Batteries are multi-connected for each two PIMs.

PWR PIM3

BATT CA INT

PWR

BATT CA INT

PIM7

PWR CA-A PWR BATT CA INT PWR BATT CA INT

PWR CA-A

PIM2

PIM6

PWR

BATT CA INT

PWR

BATT CA INT

PIM1

PIM5

PWR CA-A PWR BATT CA INT PWR BATT CA INT

PWR CA-A

PIM0

PIM4

98
90094-11

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
BATTERY CONNECTION

External / BATTM Battery Connection


(1) (2) (3) Connect the BATT CA EXT cable to the batteries as shown below. Mount the battery units (24V DC, 24AH per unit) into the Battery Module (BATTM), if the BATTM required. Plug the BATT CA EXT connector into the BATT1 connector on the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 card in PIM0 or PIM4. Screws are attached to the BATTM.

NOTE:

Battery Mounting into BATTM


DIMENSION OF BATTERY 175mm (6.9inch) 125mm (4.9inch) BATT CA EXT 165mm (6.5inch) Recommended Batteries Yuasa NP-24-12B Matsushita LCL-12V-24

TO BATT1 CONNECTOR ON PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 IN PIM0/PIM4

BATTERY UNIT (24V DC, 24AH)

BATTERY UNIT (24V DC, 24AH)

Continued on next page

99

Rev.1.1 90094-11

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
BATTERY CONNECTION

Battery Mounted into BATTM


TO BATT1 CONNECTOR ON PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 IN PIM0/PIM4

PIM0

BATTM

FRONT

Continued on next page

100

Rev.1.1 90094-11

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
BATTERY CONNECTION

(3)

When the system is congured with two or more PIMs, connect the BATT CA EXT and the PWR CA-A as shown below.

External/BATTM Battery Connection for Multiple-PIM Conguration


NOTE1: One pair each of battery unit (24V DC, 24AH) can be housed in a BATTM, for each two PIMs. NOTE2: External Batteries are multi-connected for each four PIMs.

PWR PIM3

PWR PIM7

PWR PIM2

PWR CA-A

PWR

PWR CA-A PIM6

PWR PIM1

PWR PIM5

PWR PIM0 BATT CA EXT

PWR PIM4 BATT CA EXT

BATTM/ EXTERNAL BATT

BATTM/ EXTERNAL BATT

101
90094-11

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
CABLE RUNNING TO MDF

CABLE RUNNING TO MDF


Installation of External MDF
Secure the external MDF onto the oor or the wall. Mount the required MDF components. If required, install the cable ducts for the cables to be laid between the MDF and the Main Equipment. In this case, conrm the locations of the cable holes for the Main Equipment.

MDF Cable Hole Location

MODULE

BASE

FRONT

: CABLE HOLE

102
90102-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
CABLE RUNNING TO MDF

MDF Cable
To facilitate the termination of the 25 pair cables (MDF cables) from the system to the MDF shown below, the length of each cable to be used should be predetermined according to the distance between the MDF and the system. Each cable should be labeled at both ends using a cable number or cable designation as shown below.

MDF Cable
CHAMP CONNECTOR

TO PIM

TWISTED 25 PAIR CABLES

TO MDF

103
90102-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
CABLE RUNNING TO MDF

MDF Cables for each PIM FROM MODULE


PIM0

CONNECTION
LTC0 LTC1 LTC2 LTC3

CABLE NUMBER
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

TO
MDF

CABLE DESIGNATION
0 LTC0 0 LTC1 0 LTC2 0 LTC3

PIM1

LTC0 LTC1 LTC2 LTC3

MDF

1 LTC0 1 LTC1 1 LTC2 1 LTC3

PIM2

LTC0 LTC1 LTC2 LTC3

MDF

2 LTC0 2 LTC1 2 LTC2 2 LTC3

PIM3

LTC0 LTC1 LTC2 LTC3

MDF

3 LTC0 3 LTC1 3 LTC2 3 LTC3

PIM4

LTC0 LTC1 LTC2 LTC3

MDF

4 LTC0 4 LTC1 4 LTC2 4 LTC3

PIM5

LTC0 LTC1 LTC2 LTC3

MDF

5 LTC0 5 LTC1 5 LTC2 5 LTC3


Continued on next page

104
90102-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
CABLE RUNNING TO MDF

MDF Cables for each PIM FROM MODULE


PIM6

CONNECTION
LTC0 LTC1 LTC2 LTC3

CABLE NUMBER
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

TO
MDF

CABLE DESIGNATION
6 LTC0 6 LTC1 6 LTC2 6 LTC3

PIM7

LTC0 LTC1 LTC2 LTC3

MDF

7 LTC0 7 LTC1 7 LTC2 7 LTC3

105
90102-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
CABLE RUNNING TO MDF

Cable Running to External MDF


(1) When using the cable hole of the BASE, bring the MDF cable up to the Main Equipment through the cable hole of the BASE. When using the cable hole of the PIM, make the cable hole on the right side of PIM. Then, bring the MDF cable up to PIM0 through the cable hole of the BASE, and bring the MDF cable up to the other PIM through the cable hole (right side) of each PIM.

(2)

Making Cable Hole on PIM

FRONT

CUT OFF THE PLATE.

FILE THE PROJECTIONS.

PUT IN THE EDGINGS.

106
90102-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
CABLE RUNNING TO MDF

(3)

Connect the champ connector of each MDF cable to the LTC connector located on the PIM using the screws provided, as shown below. Secure the MDF cables to the PIM using tie wraps.

(4)

Cable Running to External MDF


(a) Using cable hole of BASE

PIM3

LTC CONNECTOR PIM2 CHAMP CONNECTOR

PIM1

PIM0

BATTM

TO MDF FRONT

Continued on next page


107
90102-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
CABLE RUNNING TO MDF

Cable Running to the External MDF


(b) Using cable hole of PIM

PIM3

LTC CONNECTOR PIM2 CHAMP CONNECTOR

TO MDF

PIM1

TO MDF

PIM0

TO MDF

TO MDF BATTM

FRONT

108
90102-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF


Cable Connection to MDF
Connect the cables to the MDF referring to below.

Card Slots and the LTC Connectors

LT01/AP01

LT02/AP02

LT03/AP03

LT04/AP04

LT05/AP05

LT06/AP06

LT07/AP07

LT08/AP08

LT09/AP09

LT10/AP10

LT11/AP11/FP11

MP12/FP12

PFT

VM

LT00/AP00

PIM0 - 7

AC/DC PWR

LTC1 LTC0 LTC2

LTC3

DC/DC PWR

BWB

FRONT

LTC Connector Accommodation LTC CONNECTOR


LTC0 LTC1 LTC2 LTC3

CARD SLOT NUMBER


LT00 - LT02/AP00 - AP02 LT03 - LT05/AP03 - AP05 LT06 - LT08/AP06 - AP08 LT09 - LT11/AP09 - AP11

REMARKS

109
90109-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

Location of Each LEN


This gure shows the relationship between each Line Equipment Number (LEN) and each Card Slot Number (LT Number). LEN 000 - 363 (PIM0 - 3) LEN 400 - 763 (PIM4 - 7)

page 111 page 112

110
90109-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

LEN 000 - 363 (PIM0 - 3)

Location of each LEN


XYY XYY XYY XYY XYY XYY XYY XYY (LTXX) 307 306 305 304 303 302 301 300 (LT00)

LEN (LINE EQUIPMENT NUMBER) X : PIM NUMBER YY : PORT NUMBER CARD SLOT NUMBER 315 314 313 312 311 310 309 308 (LT01) 323 322 321 320 319 318 317 316 (LT02) 331 330 329 328 327 326 325 324 (LT03) 339 338 337 336 335 334 333 332 (LT04) 347 346 345 344 343 342 341 340 (LT05) 355 354 353 352 351 350 349 348 (LT06) 363 362 361 360 359 358 357 356 (LT07)

PIM3

339 338 337 336 (LT08)

347 346 345 344 (LT09)

355 354 353 352 (LT10)

363 362 361 360 (LT11)

PIM2

207 206 205 204 203 202 201 200 (LT00)

215 214 213 212 211 210 209 208 (LT01)

223 222 221 220 219 218 217 216 (LT02)

231 230 229 228 227 226 225 224 (LT03)

239 238 237 236 235 234 233 232 (LT04)

247 246 245 244 243 242 241 240 (LT05)

255 254 253 252 251 250 249 248 (LT06)

263 262 261 260 259 258 257 256 (LT07)

*
239 238 237 236 (LT08) 247 246 245 244 (LT09) 255 254 253 252 (LT10) 263 262 261 260 (LT11)

PIM1

107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 (LT00)

115 114 113 112 111 110 109 108 (LT01)

123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 (LT02)

131 130 129 128 127 126 125 124 (LT03)

139 138 137 136 135 134 133 132 (LT04)

147 146 145 144 143 142 141 140 (LT05)

155 154 153 152 151 150 149 148 (LT06)

163 162 161 160 159 158 157 156 (LT07)

*
139 138 137 136 (LT08) 147 146 145 144 (LT09) 155 154 153 152 (LT10) 163 162 161 160 (LT11)

PIM0

007 006 005 004 003 002 001 000 (LT00)

015 014 013 012 011 010 009 008 (LT01)

023 022 021 020 019 018 017 016 (LT02)

031 030 029 028 027 026 025 024 (LT03)

039 038 037 036 035 034 033 032 (LT04)

047 046 045 044 043 042 041 040 (LT05)

055 054 053 052 051 050 049 048 (LT06)

063 062 061 060 059 058 057 056 (LT07)

*
039 038 037 036 (LT08) 047 046 045 044 (LT09) 055 054 053 052 (LT10) 063 062 061 060 (LT11)

*
* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port cards are mounted in Slot04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot08-11.

111
90109-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

LEN 400 - 763 (PIM 4 - 7)

Location of each LEN


707 706 705 704 703 702 701 700 (LT00) 715 714 713 712 711 710 709 708 (LT01) 723 722 721 720 719 718 717 716 (LT02) 731 730 729 728 727 726 725 724 (LT03) 739 738 737 736 735 734 733 732 (LT04) 747 746 745 744 743 742 741 740 (LT05) 755 754 753 752 751 750 749 748 (LT06) 763 762 761 760 759 758 757 756 (LT07)

PIM7

739 738 737 736 (LT08)

747 746 745 744 (LT09)

755 754 753 752 (LT10)

763 762 761 760 (LT11)

PIM6

607 606 605 604 603 602 601 600 (LT00)

615 614 613 612 611 610 609 608 (LT01)

623 622 621 620 619 618 617 616 (LT02)

631 630 629 628 627 626 625 624 (LT03)

639 638 637 636 635 634 633 632 (LT04)

647 646 645 644 643 642 641 640 (LT05)

655 654 653 652 651 650 649 648 (LT06)

663 662 661 660 659 658 657 656 (LT07)

*
639 638 637 636 (LT08) 647 646 645 644 (LT09) 655 654 653 652 (LT10) 663 662 661 660 (LT11)

PIM5

507 506 505 504 503 502 501 500 (LT00)

515 514 513 512 511 510 509 508 (LT01)

523 522 521 520 519 518 517 516 (LT02)

531 530 529 528 527 526 525 524 (LT03)

539 538 537 536 535 534 533 532 (LT04)

547 546 545 544 543 542 541 540 (LT05)

555 554 553 552 551 550 549 548 (LT06)

563 562 561 560 559 558 557 556 (LT07)

*
539 538 537 536 (LT08) 547 546 545 544 (LT09) 555 554 553 552 (LT10) 563 562 561 560 (LT11)

PIM4

407 406 405 404 403 402 401 400 (LT00)

415 414 413 412 411 410 409 408 (LT01)

423 422 421 420 419 418 417 416 (LT02)

431 430 429 428 427 426 425 424 (LT03)

439 438 437 436 435 434 433 432 (LT04)

447 446 445 444 443 442 441 440 (LT05)

455 454 453 452 451 450 449 448 (LT06)

463 462 461 460 459 458 457 456 (LT07)

*
439 438 437 436 (LT08) 447 446 445 444 (LT09) 455 454 453 452 (LT10) 463 462 461 460 (LT11)

*
* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port cards are mounted in Slot04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot08-11.

112
90109-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

LTC Connector Pin Arrangement


This gure shows the LTC Connector Pin Arrangement. PIM0 (LTC0 - LTC3) PIM1 (LTC0 - LTC3) PIM2 (LTC0 - LTC3) PIM3 (LTC0 - LTC3) PIM4 (LTC0 - LTC3) PIM5 (LTC0 - LTC3) PIM6 (LTC0 - LTC3) PIM7 (LTC0 - LTC3)

page 114 page 115 page 116 page 117 page 118 page 119 page 120 page 121

113
90109-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

PIM0 (LTC0 - LTC3)

LTC Connector Pin Arrangement


LTC0 1 26 2 27 3 28 4 29 5 30 6 31 7 32 8 33 9 34 10 35 11 36 12 37 13 38 14 39 15 40 16 41 17 42 18 43 19 44 20 45 21 46 22 47 23 48 24 49 25 MJ 50 MN LTC2 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LEN000 001 002 003 LT00/AP00 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 LT01/AP01 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 LT02/AP02 020 021 022 LEN023 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LTC1 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LTC3 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LEN024 025 LT03/AP03 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 LT04/AP04 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 LT05/AP05 042 043 044 045 046 LEN047

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

LEN048 049 050 051 LT06/AP06 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 LT07/AP07 060 061 062 063 036 037 LT08/AP08* 038 LEN039

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

LEN044 045 LT09/AP09* 046 047

052 053 LT10/AP10* 054 055

060 061 LT11/AP11* 062 LEN063

* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port cards are mounted in Slot04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot08-11.

114
90109-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

PIM1 (LTC0 - LTC3)

LTC Connector Pin Arrangement


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LTC0 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LTC2 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LEN100 101 102 103 LT00/AP00 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 LT01/AP01 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 LT02/AP02 120 121 122 LEN123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LTC1 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LTC3 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LEN124 125 LT03/AP03 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 LT04/AP04 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 LT05/AP05 142 143 144 145 146 LEN147

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

LEN148 149 150 151 LT06/AP06 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 LT07/AP07 160 161 162 163 136 137 LT08/AP08* 138 LEN139

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

LEN144 145 LT09/AP09* 146 147

152 153 LT10/AP10* 154 155

160 161 LT11/AP11* 162 LEN163

* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port cards are mounted in Slot04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot08-11.

115
90109-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

PIM2 (LTC0 - LTC3)

LTC Connector Pin Arrangement


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LTC0 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LTC2 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LEN200 201 202 203 LT00/AP00 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 LT01/AP01 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 LT02/AP02 220 221 222 LEN223 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LTC1 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LTC3 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LEN224 225 LT03/AP03 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 LT04/AP04 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 LT05/AP05 242 243 244 245 246 LEN247

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

LEN248 249 250 251 LT06/AP06 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 LT07/AP07 260 261 262 263 236 237 LT08/AP08* 238 LEN239

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

LEN244 245 LT09/AP09* 246 247

252 253 LT10/AP10* 254 255

260 261 LT11/AP11* 262 LEN263

* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port cards are mounted in Slot04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot08-11.

116
90109-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

PIM3 (LTC0 - LTC3)

LTC Connector Pin Arrangement


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LTC0 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LTC2 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LEN300 301 302 303 LT00/AP00 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 LT01/AP01 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 LT02/AP02 320 321 322 LEN323 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LTC1 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LTC3 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LEN324 325 LT03/AP03 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 LT04/AP04 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 LT05/AP05 342 343 344 345 346 LEN347

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

LEN348 349 350 351 LT06/AP06 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 LT07/AP07 360 361 362 363 336 337 LT08/AP08* 338 LEN339

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

LEN344 345 LT09/AP09* 346 347

352 353 LT10/AP10* 354 355

360 361 LT11/AP11* 362 LEN363

* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port cards are mounted in Slot04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot08-11.

117
90109-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

PIM4 (LTC0 - LTC3)

LTC Connector Pin Arrangement


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LTC0 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LTC2 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LEN400 401 402 403 LT00/AP00 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 LT01/AP01 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 LT02/AP02 420 421 422 LEN423 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LTC1 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LTC3 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LEN424 425 LT03/AP03 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 LT04/AP04 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 LT05/AP05 442 443 444 445 446 LEN447

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

LEN448 449 450 451 LT06/AP06 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 LT07/AP07 460 461 462 463 436 437 LT08/AP08* 438 LEN439

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

LEN444 445 LT09/AP09* 446 447

452 453 LT10/AP10* 454 455

460 461 LT11/AP11* 462 LEN463

* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port cards are mounted in Slot04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot08-11.

118
90109-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

PIM5 (LTC0 - LTC3)

LTC Connector Pin Arrangement


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LTC0 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LTC2 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LEN500 501 502 503 LT00/AP00 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 LT01/AP01 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 LT02/AP02 520 521 522 LEN523 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LTC1 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LTC3 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LEN524 525 LT03/AP03 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 LT04/AP04 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 LT05/AP05 542 543 544 545 546 LEN547

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

LEN548 549 550 551 LT06/AP06 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 LT07/AP07 560 561 562 563 536 537 LT08/AP08* 538 LEN539

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

LEN544 545 LT09/AP09* 546 547

552 553 LT10/AP10* 554 555

560 561 LT11/AP11* 562 LEN563

* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port cards are mounted in Slot04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot08-11.

119
90109-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

PIM6 (LTC0 - LTC3)

LTC Connector Pin Arrangement


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LTC0 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LTC2 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LEN600 601 602 603 LT00/AP00 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 LT01/AP01 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 LT02/AP02 620 621 622 LEN623 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LTC1 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LTC3 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LEN624 625 LT03/AP03 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 LT04/AP04 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 LT05/AP05 642 643 644 645 646 LEN647

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

LEN648 649 650 651 LT06/AP06 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 LT07/AP07 660 661 662 663 636 637 LT08/AP08* 638 LEN639

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

LEN644 645 LT09/AP09* 646 647

652 653 LT10/AP10* 654 655

660 661 LT11/AP11* 662 LEN663

* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port cards are mounted in Slot04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot08-11.

120
90109-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

PIM7 (LTC0 - LTC3)

LTC Connector Pin Arrangement


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LTC0 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LTC2 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LEN700 701 702 703 LT00/AP00 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 LT01/AP01 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 LT02/AP02 720 721 722 LEN723 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LTC1 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LTC3 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LEN724 725 LT03/AP03 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 LT04/AP04 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 LT05/AP05 742 743 744 745 746 LEN747

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

LEN748 749 750 751 LT06/AP06 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 LT07/AP07 760 761 762 763 736 737 LT08/AP08* 738 LEN739

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

LEN744 745 LT09/AP09* 746 747

752 753 LT10/AP10* 754 755

760 761 LT11/AP11* 762 LEN763

* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port cards are mounted in Slot04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot08-11.

121
90109-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

MDF Cross Connections


This table shows the cross connections on the MDF for LTC0 - LTC3.

LTC0 - LTC3 MDF Cross Connection


NOTE1: PIN No.46, 21 to 49, 24 on LTC3 cannot be used. NOTE2: PIN No.46, 21 to 49, 24 on LTC2 and LTC3 cannot be used. NOTE3: For the Digital Trunk Interface card, use the different LTC connector from the analog line/trunk card. The digital line should be separated from the analog line. TYPE OF INTERFACE PIN RUNNING STATION SLOTS CABLE CABLE CO LDT 2-W 4-W E&M E&M DID SLT

8COT 4COT 2LDT 2ODT 2ODT AUC 4DIT 8LC 4LC AUC 26 1 27 2 28 3 29 4 30 5 31 6 32 7 33 8 WH-BL BL-WH WH-OR OR-WH WH-GN GN-WH WH-BR BR-WH WH-SL SL-WH RD-BL BL-RD RD-OR OR-RD RD-GN GN-RD GN RD BK YL GN RD BK YL GN RD BK YL GN RD BK YL
NOTE1

T0 R0 T1 R1 T2 R2 T3 1 R3 T4 R4 T5 R5 T6 R6 T7 R7

T0 R0 T1 R1 T2 R2 T3 R3

T0 R0 T1 R1

T0 R0

TxT0

T0

T0 R0 T1 R1 T2 R2 T3 R3

T0 R0 T1 R1 T2 R2 T3 R3 T4 R4 T5 R5 T6 R6 T7 R7

T0 R0 T1 R1 T2 R2 T3 R3

T0 R0 T1 R1

TxR0 R0

RcvT0 T1 RcvR0 R1
T1 R1 TxT1 TxR1

RcvT1 RcvR1

Continued on next page

122
90109-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

LTC0 - LTC3 MDF Cross Connection Information


TYPE OF INTERFACE PIN RUNNING STATION SLOTS CABLE CABLE CO LDT 2-W 4-W E&M E&M DID SLT

8COT 4COT 2LDT 2ODT 2ODT AUC 4DIT 8LC 4LC AUC 34 9 35 10 36 11 37 12 38 13 39 14 40 15 41 16 RD-BR BR-RD RD-SL SL-RD BK-BL BL-BK BK-OR OR-BK BK-GN GN-BK BK-BR BR-BK BK-SL SL-BK YL-BL BL-YL GN RD BK YL GN RD BK YL GN RD BK YL GN RD BK YL
NOTE1

T0 R0 T1 R1 T2 R2 T3 2 R3 T4 R4 T5 R5 T6 R6 T7 R7

T0 R0 T1 R1 T2 R2 T3 R3

T0 R0 T1 R1

T0 R0

TxT0

T0

T0 R0 T1 R1 T2 R2 T3 R3

T0 R0 T1 R1 T2 R2 T3 R3 T4 R4 T5 R5 T6 R6 T7 R7

T0 R0 T1 R1 T2 R2 T3 R3

T0 R0 T1 R1

TxR0 R0

T1 RcvT0 T1 R1 RcvR0 R1 TxT1 TxR1

RcvT1 RcvR1

Continued on next page

123
90109-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

LTC0 - LTC3 MDF Cross Connection Information


TYPE OF INTERFACE PIN RUNNING STATION SLOTS CABLE CABLE CO LDT 2-W 4-W E&M E&M DID SLT

8COT 4COT 2LDT 2ODT 2ODT AUC 4DIT 8LC 4LC AUC 42 17 43 18 44 19 45 20 46 21 47 22 48 23 49 24 50 25 YL-OR OR-YL YL-GN GN-YL YL-BR BR-YL YL-SL SL-YL VI-BL BL-VI VI-OR OR-VI VI-GN GN-VI VI-BR BR-VI VI-SL SL-VI GN RD BK YL GN RD BK YL GN RD BK YL GN RD BK YL MN* MJ*
Continued on next page NOTE2

T0 R0 T1 R1 T2 R2 T3 3 R3 T4 R4 T5 R5 T6 R6 T7 R7

T0 R0 T1 R1 T2 R2 T3 R3

T0 R0 T1 R1

T0 R0

TxT0

T0

T0 R0 T1 R1 T2 R2 T3 R3

T0 R0 T1 R1 T2 R2 T3 R3 T4 R4 T5 R5 T6 R6 T7 R7

T0 R0 T1 R1 T2 R2 T3 R3

T0 R0 T1 R1

TxR0 R0

RcvT0 T1 RcvR0 R1
T1 R1 TxT1 TxR1

RcvT1 RcvR1

PIN No.50, 25 in PIM0 are connected to external indication equipment for major card minor alarm.

124
90109-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

LTC0 - LTC3 MDF Cross Connection Information


TYPE OF INTERFACE RUNNING STATION SLOTS CABLE CABLE 2wire Dterm/ SMARTCON/ DSSCON/ DESKCON 8DLC 4DLC 2DLC 26 1 27 2 28 3 29 4 30 5 31 6 32 7 33 8 WH-BL BL-WH WH-OR OR-WH WH-GN GN-WH WH-BR BR-WH WH-SL SL-WH RD-BL BL-RD RD-OR OR-RD RD-GN GN-RD GN RD BK YL GN RD BK YL GN RD BK YL GN RD BK YL
NOTE1

PIN

4wire EXT. EXT. SMARTCON KEY/ PAGE/ Digital (SN610 EXT. MOH/ TRK NOTE3 ATTCON) RELAY BGM 2DLCC RA0 TA0 RB0 TB0 RA1 TA1 RB1 TB1 DK00 4COT K1 K0 K3 K2 K5 K4 K7 K6 T R T R T R T R DTI RA RB TA TB

T0 R0 T1 R1 T2 R2 T3 1 R3 T4 R4 T5 R5 T6 R6 T7 R7

T0 R0 T1 R1 T2 R2 T3 R3

T0 R0 T1 R1

Continued on next page

125
90109-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

LTC0 - LTC3 MDF Cross Connection Information


TYPE OF INTERFACE RUNNING STATION SLOTS CABLE CABLE 2wire Dterm/ SMARTCON/ DSSCON/ DESKCON 8DLC 4DLC 2DLC 34 9 35 10 36 11 37 12 38 13 39 14 40 15 41 16 RD-BR BR-RD RD-SL SL-RD BK-BL BL-BK BK-OR OR-BK BK-GN GN-BK BK-BR BR-BK BK-SL SL-BK YL-BL BL-YL GN RD BK YL GN RD BK YL GN RD BK YL GN RD BK YL
NOTE1

PIN

4wire EXT. EXT. SMARTCON KEY/ PAGE/ Digital (SN610 EXT. MOH/ TRK NOTE3 ATTCON) RELAY BGM 2DLCC RA0 TA0 RB0 TB0 RA1 TA1 RB1 TB1 DK00 4COT K1 K0 K3 K2 K5 K4 K7 K6 T R T R T R T R DTI RA RB TA TB

T0 R0 T1 R1 T2 R2 T3 2 R3 T4 R4 T5 R5 T6 R6 T7 R7

T0 R0 T1 R1 T2 R2 T3 R3

T0 R0 T1 R1

Continued on next page

126
90109-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF

LTC0 - LTC3 MDF Cross Connection Information


TYPE OF INTERFACE RUNNING STATION SLOTS CABLE CABLE 2wire Dterm/ SMARTCON/ DSSCON/ DESKCON 8DLC 4DLC 2DLC 42 17 43 18 44 19 45 20 46 21 47 22 48 23 49 24 50 25 YL-OR OR-YL YL-GN GN-YL YL-BR BR-YL YL-SL SL-YL VI-BL BL-VI VI-OR OR-VI VI-GN GN-VI VI-BR BR-VI VI-SL SL-VI GN RD BK YL GN RD BK YL GN RD BK YL GN RD BK YL MN* MJ*
NOTE2

PIN

4wire EXT. EXT. SMARTCON KEY/ PAGE/ Digital (SN610 EXT. MOH/ TRK NOTE3 ATTCON) RELAY BGM 2DLCC RA0 TA0 RB0 TB0 RA1 TA1 RB1 TB1 DK00 4COT K1 K0 K3 K2 K5 K4 K7 K6 T R T R T R T R DTI RA RB TA TB

T0 R0 T1 R1 T2 R2 T3 3 R3 T4 R4 T5 R5 T6 R6 T7 R7

T0 R0 T1 R1 T2 R2 T3 R3

T0 R0 T1 R1

PIN No.50, 25 in PIM0 are connected to external indication equipment for major card minor alarm.

127
90109-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

INSTALLATION OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT


Peripheral Equipment and Card List
PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
Analog C.O. Trunk Tie Line Trunk DID Trunk Digital Trunk Interface Optical Interface Single Line Telephone Dterm/DSS Console SN716 DESKCON SN610/708/709/712/741 ATTCON Day/Night Mode Change by External Key External TAS Indicator Paging Equipment External Tone Source/Announcement Machine External BGM Source PN-2LDT PN-2ODT PN-AUC PN-4DIT PN-24DTA/PN-30DTC PZ-M542/PZ-M557 [For Others/Australia] PN-M10 PN-24DTA/PN-30DTC PN-4LC/PN-8LC PN-AUC PN-2DLC PN-4DLC/PN-8DLC PN-4DLC/PN-8DLC PN-2DLC/PN-4DLC/PN-8DLC PN-DK00/PN-CP14 PN-DK00 PN-2COT/PN-4COT/PN-6COT/PN-8COT PN-DK00/PN-CP14 PN-2COT/PN-4COT/PN-6COT/PN-8COT PN-TNTA PN-DK00/PN-CP14 PN-2COT/PN-4COT/PN-6COT/PN-8COT PN-TNTA PN-DK00/PN-CP14 PN-2COT/PN-4COT/PN-6COT/PN-8COT PN-AUC PN-8PFTB PN-8LC PN-8COT PN-CP14 PN-CP14 PN-AP00-B

CIRCUIT CARD
PN-2COT/PN-4COT/PN-6COT/PN-8COT

REFERENCE Page
page 129 page 130 page 135 page 137 page 143-1 page 144 page 146 page 148 page 158 page 168 page 169 page 172 page 175

page 180

Power Failure Transfer Power Failure Transfer

page 182 page 185

Alarm Display Panel Built-in SMDR SMDR/PMS/MCI/CIS Printer/ Hotel Printer

page 190 page 191 page 194

128

Rev.1.1 90128-11

Analog C.O. Trunk (COT)

Analog C.O. Trunk (COT)


MDF Cross Connection for C.O. Trunk Card
PIM0 LTC0 PN-8COT R0 LEN000 (No. 0) T0 R1 LEN001 (No. 1) T1 27 27 J 1 26 2 P 1 26 2 MDF

LT00


LEN006 (No. 6)


R6 T6 R7


7 32 8 33


7 32 8 33

TO C.O. LINE

LEN007

(No. 7) T7

LTC0 (J) LEN000 LEN001 LEN006 LEN007 1 2 7 8 R0 R1 R6 R7 26 27 32 33 T0 T1 T6 T7 26 27 32 33

LTC0 (P) T0 T1 T6 T7 1 2 7 8 R0 R1 R6 R7

129
90129-10

Tie Line Trunk (LDT/ODT)

Tie Line Trunk (LDT/ODT)


LD Trunk (PN-2LDT)

MDF Cross Connection for LD Trunk Card


PIM0 LTC0 PN-2LDT R0 LEN000 (No. 0) T0 R1 LEN001 LT00 (No. 1) T1 J 1 26 2 27 P 1 26 2 27 TO TIE LINE TO TIE LINE MDF

LTC0 (J) LEN000 LEN001 1 2 3 4 R0 R1 26 27 28 29 T0 T1 26 27 28 29

LTC0 (P) T0 T1 1 2 3 4 R0 R1

130
90130-10

Tie Line Trunk (LDT/ODT)

4W E&M Trunk (PN-2ODT) When connecting the E and M, make the installation cable by using the connector attached with the PN-2ODT card. NOTE: Both No. 0 and No. 1 circuits must be set to same purpose (2-wire or 4-wire) in one PN2ODT card.

MDF Cross Connection for 4W E&M Trunk Card


PIM0 INSTALLATION CABLE

PN-2ODT CN1 2 08 07 06 J 05 04 M1 03 E1 02 M0 01 E0 LT00 TxR0 TxT0 LEN000 (No. 0) RcvR0 RcvT0 TxR1 LEN001 (No. 1) TxT1 RcvR1 RcvT1 2 27 3 28 4 29 2 27 3 28 4 29 LEN000 (No. 0) LTC0 J 1 26 P 1 26 LEN001 (No. 1)

MDF

(M) (E)

(Tx Ring) (Tx Tip) (Rcv Ring) (Rcv Tip) TO TIE LINE

Continued on next page

131
90130-10

Tie Line Trunk (LDT/ODT)

MDF Cross Connection for 4W E&M Trunk Card


1 LTC CONNECTOR LTC0 (J) LEN000 LEN001 1 TxR0 26 TxT0 2 RcvR0 27 RcvT0 3 TxR1 28 TxT1 4 RcvR1 29 RcvT1 LTC0 (P) 26 TxT0 27 RcvT0 28 TxT1 29 RcvT1 1 TxR0 2 RcvR0 3 TxR1 4 RcvR1 CN1 2 CN1 CONNECTOR (FRONT CONNECTOR)

LEN001 LEN000

M1 E1 M0 E0

132
90130-10

Tie Line Trunk (LDT/ODT)

2W E&M Trunk (PN-2ODT) When connecting the E and M, make the installation cable by using the connector attached with the PN-2ODT card. NOTE: Both No. 0 and No. 1 circuits must be set to same purpose (2-wire or 4-wire) in one PN2ODT card.

MDF Cross Connection for 2W E&M Trunk Card


PIM0 INSTALLATION CABLE

PN-2ODT CN1 2 08 07 06 J 05 04 03 02 01 LT00 R0 T0 LEN000 (No. 0) M1 E1 M0 E0 LEN000 (No. 0) LTC0 J 1 26 P 1 26 LEN001 (No. 1)

MDF

(M) (E)

(Ring) (Tip) TO TIE LINE

R2 LEN001 (No. 1) T2

3 28

3 28

Continued on next page

133
90130-10

Tie Line Trunk (LDT/ODT)

MDF Cross Connection for 2W E&M Trunk Card


1 LTC CONNECTOR LTC0 (J) LEN000 LEN001 1 2 3 4 R0 R2 26 27 28 29 T0 T2 26 27 28 29 LTC0 (P) T0 T2 1 2 3 4 R0 R2 CN1 2 CN1 CONNECTOR (FRONT CONNECTOR)

LEN001 LEN000

M1 E1 M0 E0

134
90130-10

DID Trunk (AUC/DIT)

DID Trunk (AUC/DIT)


2 Line DID Trunk (PN-AUC)

MDF Cross Connection for 2 Line DID Trunk Card


PIM0 LTC0 PN-AUC R0 LEN000 (No. 0) T0 R1 LEN001 (No. 1) LT00 T1 J 1 26 2 27 P 1 26 2 27 TO DID LINE TO DID LINE MDF

LTC0 (J) LEN000 LEN001 1 2 3 4 R0 R1 26 27 28 29 T0 T1 26 27 28 29

LTC0 (P) T0 T1 1 2 3 4 R0 R1

135
90135-10

DID Trunk (AUC/DIT)

4 Line DID Trunk (PN-4DIT)

MDF Cross Connection for 4 Line DID Trunk Card


PIM0 LTC0 PN-4DIT R0 LEN000 (No. 0) T0 R1 LEN001 LT00 R2 LEN002 (No. 2) T2 R3 LEN003 (No. 3) T3 3 28 4 29 3 28 4 29 TO DID LINE TO DID LINE (No. 1) T1 27 27 J 1 26 2 P 1 26 2 TO DID LINE TO DID LINE MDF

LTC0 (J) LEN000 LEN001 LEN002 LEN003 1 2 3 4 R0 R1 R2 R3 26 27 28 29 T0 T1 T2 T3 26 27 28 29

LTC0 (P) T0 T1 T2 T3 1 2 3 4 R0 R1 R2 R3

136
90135-10

Digital Trunk Interface (DTI)

Digital Trunk Interface (DTI)


DTI for using a twisted pair cable (PN-24DTA/PN-30DTC) When using a twisted-pair cable, connect the cable to a CSU via the MDF as shown below.

DTI Cable Connection via MDF


PBX BWB PN24DTA/ PN30DTC MDF TWISTED-PAIR CABLE (SHIELD TYPE)

CSU

LTC0/LTC1/LTC2/LTC3 CONNECTOR

MAX. 200m (655ft.) ............ 24-DTI MAX. 400m (1310ft.)........... 30-DTI

137
90137-10

Digital Trunk Interface (DTI)

MDF Cross Connection for DTI Card


PIM 0 LTC1 PN-24DTA/PN-30DTC J P MDF

RECEIVE AP05 RA RB TA TB 17 42 18 43 17 42 18 43 RA RB TA TB TRANSFER TO CSU

LTC1 (J)

LTC1 (P)

17 18 19 20

RA TA

42 43 44 45

RB TB

42 43 44 45

RB TB

17 18 19 20

RA TA

138
90137-10

Digital Trunk Interface (DTI)

DTI for using a coaxial cable (PN-30DTC/PZ-M542/PZ-M557) When using an coaxial cable, connect the cable to a CSU via the CONN (PZ-M542/PZM557) card as shown below.

DTI Cable Connection via CONN Card


PBX BWB

PN30DTC

CSU COAXIAL CABLE

CONN (PZ-M542/PZ-M557) LTC0/LTC1/LTC2/LTC3 CONNECTOR

MAX. 6dB loss at 1024kHz

139
90137-10

Digital Trunk Interface (DTI)

Coaxial Cable Connection for DTI Card


PIM 0 PN-30DTC J LTC1 PZ-M542/PZ-M557 P

AP05 RA RB TA TB 17 42 18 43 17 RCV 42 18 43 TRS

RECEIVE

TO CSU

SEND 2

1 LTC1 CONNECTOR LTC1 (J) LTC1 (P)

2 COAXIAL CONNECTOR

17 18 19 20

RA TA

42 43 44 45

RB TB

42 43 44 45

RB TB

17 18 19 20

RA TA

140
90137-10

Digital Trunk Interface (DTI)

Mounting of CONN Card (PZ-M542/PZ-M557) STEP1: When using LTC0 or LTC2 connector to mount the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card, take off the PLATE from the PZ-M542/PZ-M547 card. Then, overturn the PLATE and secure it to the card with screws. When using LTC1 or LTC3 connector to mount the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card, skip STEP1. NOTE: The PLATE and screws are attached to the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card.

Connection of PZ-M542/PZ-M557 and PLATE


PLATE

PZ-M542/PZ-M557

SCREW

141
90137-10

Digital Trunk Interface (DTI)

STEP2: Connect the LT connector on the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card to the LTC connector on BWB in PIM. NOTE: Two PZ-M542/PZ-M557 cards can not be mounted on the adjoining LTC connectors. LTC0 and LTC2/LTC0 and LTC3/LTC1 and LTC3 are mountable.

Mounting of PZ-M542/PZ-M557 Card

PIM LTC CONNECTOR

LTC LTC 0

1 LTC LTC 3

When connecting to LTC1 or LTC3


LTC CONNECTOR

When connecting to LTC0 or LTC2

LT CONNECTOR

PZ-M547/PZ-M557

142
90137-10

Digital Trunk Interface (DTI)

STEP3: Secure the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card to the PIM CARD STOPPER with one screw. NOTE1: Screw is attached to the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card. NOTE2: Before securing the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card to the PIM CARD STOPPER, all the cards should be mounted on the card slots and the PIM CARD STOPPER should be secured with screws. See MOUNTING CIRCUIT CARDS. page 199

Mounting of PZ-M542/PZ-M557 Card

PZ-M542/PZ-M557 SCREW

CARD STOPPER

143
90137-10

Optical Interface (M10)

Optical Interface (M10)


When you use an optical cable to connect between the T1/E1 interface, connect the cable each other to the CN1 connector of the M10 cards in both sites. Two 24/30DTI cards are connected to one M10 card, via MDF through LTC connector on the BWB. The following gures show the outline of connection and example of M10 MDF cross connection.

Outline of Optical Cable Connection


MDF MDF

PN-24DTA/ PN-30DTC M10

OPTICAL CABLE SEND SEND

PN-24DTA/ PN-30DTC M10

PN-24DTA/ PN-30DTC

CN1

RECEIVE

RECEIVE

CN1

PN-24DTA/ PN-30DTC

MAX. 10 km (6.25 mile)

NOTE1: Use the optical cable with the following specifications. Fiber : Single mode fiber Connector : SC connector NOTE2: Connect two optical cables which are used for receive and send signals to CN1 connector of M10 card. The upside of CN1 connector is used for sending and the downside is used for receiving.

143-1

Rev.1.1 90143A11

Optical Interface (M10)

Example of M10 MDF Cross Connection via LTC Connector


PIM 0 PN-24DTA/PN-30DTC J LTC3 P MDF

AP09 RA RB TA TB 1 26 2 27 1 26 2 27 1

RECEIVE RA RB TA TB SEND

LTC3 PN-24DTA/PN-30DTC J P

AP10 RA RB TA TB 9 34 10 35 9 34 10 35 2

RECEIVE RA RB TA TB SEND

LTC1 PN-M10 RA RB No. 1 TA TB LT05 RA RB CN1 No. 0 TA TB 17 42 18 43 17 42 18 43 3 J 19 44 20 45 P 19 44 20 45 RECEIVE RA RB TA TB SEND RECEIVE RA RB TA TB SEND

SEND RECEIVE

TO OPPOSITE PN-M10 CARD (To downside of CN1 connector) TO OPPOSITE PN-M10 CARD (To upside of CN1 connector)

Continued on next page

143-2

Rev.1.1 90143A11

Optical Interface (M10)

Example of M10 MDF Cross Connection via LTC Connector


1 LTC3 CONNECTOR

1 2 3 4

RA TA

26 27 28 29

RB TB

26 27 28 29

RB TB

1 2 3 4

RA TA

LTC (J)

(P)

2 LTC3 CONNECTOR

9 10 11 12

RA TA

34 35 36 37

RB TB

34 35 36 37

RB TB

9 10 11 12

RA TA

LTC (J)

(P)

3 LTC1 CONNECTOR

17 18 19 20

RA TA

42 43 44 45

RB TB

42 43 44 45

RB TB

17 18 19 20

RA TA

LTC (J)

(P)

143-3

Rev.1.1 90143A11

THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY.

143-4

Rev.1.1 90143A11

Single Line Telephone (LC/AUC)

Single Line Telephone (LC/AUC)


Standard Line (PN-8LC/PN-4LC)

MDF Cross Connection for Single Line Telephone (Standard Line)


PIM0 LTC0 PN-8LC R0 LEN000 (No. 0) T0 R1 LEN001 (No. 1) T1 27 27 J 1 26 2 P 1 26 2 MDF ROSETTE TO SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE

LT00


LEN006 (No. 6)


R6 T6 R7


7 32 8 33


7 32 8 33

LEN007

(No. 7) T7

LTC0 (J) LEN000 LEN001 LEN006 LEN007 1 2 7 8 R0 R1 R6 R7 26 27 32 33 T0 T1 T6 T7 26 27 32 33

LTC0 (P) T0 T1 T6 T7 1 2 7 8 R0 R1 R6 R7

144
90144-10

Single Line Telephone (LC/AUC)

Long Line (PN-AUC)

MDF Cross Connection for Single Line Telephone (Long Line)


PIM0 LTC0 PN-AUC R0 LEN000 (No. 0) T0 R1 LEN001 (No. 1) LT00 T1 J 1 26 2 27 P 1 26 2 27 MDF TO SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE (FOR LONG LINE) TO SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE (FOR LONG LINE)

LTC0 (J) LEN000 LEN001 1 2 3 4 R0 R1 26 27 28 29 T0 T1 26 27 28 29

LTC0 (P) T0 T1 1 2 3 4 R0 R1

145
90144-10

Dterm/DSS Console (DLC)

Dterm/DSS Console (DLC)


Standard Line (PN-8DLC/PN-4DLC)

MDF Cross Connection for Dterm/DSS Console (Standard Line)


PIM0 LTC0 PN-8DLC R0 LEN000 (No. 0) T0 R1 LEN001 (No. 1) T1 27 27 J 1 26 2 P 1
...

MDF

ROSETTE

TO Dterm / DSS CONSOLE


Exi t

N
...

... ... ... ... ... ... ...


...

...

... ... ... ... ... ...

26
7 7 PQ PQ
RS RS

... ...

Hel p

1 1
GH GH II

...

4 4
JK JK LL

AB ABC C

2
DE DEF F

...

... ...

5 5
MN MN O O

3
Fea ture

... ...

TU TU V V
OP OP ER ER
Tra nsf er An sw er Sp

8 8

6 6

0 0

WX WX YZ YZ

9 9

Re cal l

Ho

ld

# #
Re dia l

Co nf

ea

ker

MIC

LT00


LEN006 (No. 6)


R6 T6 R7


7 32 8 33


7 32 8 33

MODULAR CONNECTOR

LEN007

(No. 7) T7

LTC0 (J) LEN000 LEN001 LEN006 LEN007 1 2 7 8 R0 R1 R6 R7 26 27 32 33 T0 T1 T6 T7 26 27 32 33

LTC0 (P) T0 T1 T6 T7 1 2 7 8 R0 R1 R6 R7

146
90146-10

Dterm/DSS Console (DLC)

Long Line (PN-2DLCB/PN-2DLCN)

MDF Cross Connection for Dterm/DSS Console (Long Line)


PIM0 LTC0 PN-2DLCB/PN-2DLCN R0 LEN000 (No. 0) T0 R1 LEN001 (No. 1) T1 LT00 MODULAR CONNECTOR 27 27 J 1 26 2 P 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
...

MDF

ROSETTE

TO Dterm / DSS CONSOLE

Exi t
... ... ...

... ... ... ...

... ...

Hel p

1 1

...

26
Ho ld Tra

4 4 GH GH
II
PQ PQ RS RS

AB ABC C

2
DE DEF F

...

... ...

7 7

JK JK LL
TU TU V V

5 5
MN MN O O

3
Fea ture

... ...

8 8

6 6

OP OP ER ER
nsf er An sw

0 0

WX WX YZ YZ

9 9

Re cal l

# #
Re
er Sp ea ker

Co

nf

dia

MIC

LTC0 (J) LEN000 LEN001 1 2 3 4 R0 R1 29 28 27 26 T0 T1 26 27 28 29

LTC0 (P) T0 T1 1 2 3 4 R0 R1

147
90146-10

SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

SN716 DESKCON (DLC)


(1) MDF Cross Connection PN-PW00 Power Option

MDF Cross Connection for SN716 DESKCON (PN-PW00 Power Option)


NOTE: When using PN-PW00 card, make the installation cable by using the connector attached with the PN-PW00 card.
INSTALLATION CABLE TO SN716 DESKCON MDF PIM0 PN-8DLC/4DLC R0 LEN000 (No. 0) T0 J 1 26 LTC0 P 1 26 E LT00 48V NOTE E 48V NOTE ROSETTE 6 5 4 3 2 1

MODULAR CONNECTOR

PN-PW00

08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01

48V E 48V E LTC0 (P) 26 48V 27 48V 1 Grd 2 Grd LEN000 1 LTC0 (J) R0 26 T0 26 LTC0 (P) T0 1 R0

148
90148-10

SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

AC Adapter Power Option

MDF Cross Connection for SN716 DESKCON (AC Adapter Power Option)
PIM0 PN-8DLC/4DLC R0 LEN000 (No. 0) T0 J 1 26 LTC0 P 1 26 MDF ROSETTE 6 5 4 3 2 1 TO SN716 DESKCON

LT00 MODULAR CONNECTOR

24V AC ADAPTER TO COMMERCIAL AC OUTLET

LTC0 (J) LEN000 1 R0 26 T0 26

LTC0 (P) T0 1 R0

149
90148-10

SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

ATTENTION

(2)

Installation of SN716 DESKCON

Contents Static Sensitive


Handling Precautions Required

STEP1: Let the handset cord through the hole on the side of the handset support tting as shown below.

CAUTION
Handle the cord with care not to snap a hook on the modular of the cord, when you let the cord through the hole.

Mounting of Handset Support to SN716 DESKCON

(01)

(02)

(03)

(04)

LDN (13) EMG

TIE (14) BV

Busy (15) TRKSL

ATND (16) Call Park

NANS (17) SC

Recall (18) SVC

PAGE (21) Start

REC

Night

Mute

Position Busy

Cancel L6 (12) 1 L5 (11) L4 (10) L3 (09) L2 (08) 0 L1 (07) # (26) (23) (25) 4 7 5 8 6 9 2 3 SRC Talk (22) (24) DEST
Volume

(19)
Release

(20)
Answer

Hold

HANDSET CORD

(DESK CONSOLE SIDE)

(HANDSET SIDE)

Continued on next page

150
90148-10

SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

ATTENTION
Contents Static Sensitive
Handling Precautions Required

Mounting of Handset Support to SN716 DESKCON

<TOP VIEW>

<BOTTOM VIEW>

HOLE <SIDE VIEW>

Continued on next page

151
90148-10

SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

ATTENTION
Contents Static Sensitive
Handling Precautions Required

STEP2: Plug the modular into HAND H/S 0 jack, and trail the cord along the groove at the bottom of the console.

Mounting of Handset Support to SN716 DESKCON

HANDSET CORD

HAND H/S 0 H/S 1

Continued on next page

152
90148-10

SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

ATTENTION
Contents Static Sensitive
Handling Precautions Required

STEP3: Fit the three small holes of the handset support tting to the projections on the bottom of the console, and x the tting by three screws.

CAUTION
Do not screw too rmly to avoid damage to the console.

Mounting of Handset Support to SN716 DESKCON


HANDSET CORD

PROJECTION

PROJECTION

HANDSET SUPPORT

153
90148-10

SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

ATTENTION
Contents Static Sensitive
Handling Precautions Required

STEP4: Plug the headset into the modular jack (H/S 0 or H/S 1) located at the bottom of the console, if required.

Headset Installation for SN716 DESKCON

HAND H/S 0 H/S 1

154
90148-10

SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

ATTENTION
Contents Static Sensitive
Handling Precautions Required

STEP5: Plug the line cord into the modular jack (LINE) located at the bottom of the console. For the MDF cross connection for the SN716 DESKCON. Refer to MDF Cross Connection for SN716 DESKCON (PN-PW00 Power Option). page 148

Cable Connection to SN716 DESKCON

LINE CORD

PAGE REC LINE

MODULAR TERMINAL 3P 3P

MDF 1P

PBX

DLC SN716 DESKCON 2P PW00

155
90148-10

SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

ATTENTION
Contents Static Sensitive
Handling Precautions Required

STEP6: When using an AC-DC ADAPTER for power supply, plug the AC-DC ADAPTER into the 12-24V DC terminal located at the rear of the console.

AC-DC ADAPTER Connection to SN716 DESKCON

12~24V DC

RS-232

AC-DC ADAPTER

156
90148-10

SN716 DESKCON (DLC)

ATTENTION
Contents Static Sensitive
Handling Precautions Required

STEP7: When using the PN-PW00 card for power supply, connect the PN-PW00 card and SN716 DESKCON by Installation cable as shown below and MDF Cross Connection for SN716 DESKCON (PN-PW00 Power Option). page 148

PN-PW00 Card Connection to the SN716 DESKCON

PZ-PW121

PN-PW00

CONN CONNECTOR

PIM

TO DESKCON

NOTE:

The PN-PW00 card occupies the adjoining left side (smaller number) slot because of its two-stories structure.

157
90148-10

SN610/708/709/712/741 ATTCON (DLC)

SN610/708/709/712/741 ATTCON (DLC)


(1) SN610 ATTCON Standard Line (PN-2DLCC)

MDF Cross Connection for SN610 ATTCON (Standard Line)


PIM0 LTC0 PN-2DLCC TA0 RA0 LEN000 (No. 0) TB0 RB0 LT00 TA1 RA1 LEN001 (No. 1) TB1 RB1 3 28 4 29 3 28 4 29 MODULAR CONNECTOR J 1 26 2 27 P 1 26 2 27 MDF ROSETTE RED GREEN YELLOW BLACK TO SN610 ATTCON

LTC0 (J) LEN000 LEN001 1 2 3 4 TA0 TB0 TA1 TB1 26 27 28 29 RA0 RB0 RA1 RB1 26 27 28 29

LTC0 (P) RA0 RB0 RA1 RB1 1 2 3 4 TA0 TB0 TA1 TB1

158

Rev.1.1 90158-11

SN610/708/709/712/741 ATTCON (DLC)

Long Line (PN-4DLCF)

MDF Cross Connection for SN610 ATTCON (Long Line)


NOTE: When using the No. 2 and No. 3 circuits of PN-4DLCF card, make the installation cable by using the connector attached with the PN-4DLCF card.
INSTALLATION CABLE

PIM0 PN-4DLCF CN1 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 LT00 TA0 RA0 LEN000 (No. 0) TB0 RB0 TA1 RA1 LEN001 (No. 1) TB1 RB1 2 RB3 TB3 RA3 TA3 RB2 TB2 RA2 TA2 J 1 26 2 27 3 28 4 29 LEN002 (No. 2) LTC0 P 1 26 2 27 3 28 4 29 RED GREEN YELLOW BLACK TO SN610 ATTCON LEN003 (No. 3) ROSETTE RED GREEN YELLOW BLACK TO SN610 ATTCON MDF MODULAR CONNECTOR

Continued on next page

159

Rev.1.1 90158-11

SN610/708/709/712/741 ATTCON (DLC)

MDF Cross Connection for SN610 ATTCON (Long Line)


1 LTC CONNECTOR LTC0 (J) LEN000 LEN001 1 2 3 4 TA0 TB0 TA1 TB1 26 27 28 29 RA0 RB0 RA1 RB1 26 27 28 29 LTC0 (P) RA0 RB0 RA1 RB1 1 2 3 4 TA0 TB0 TA1 TB1 2 CN1 CONNECTOR CN1 RB3 TB3 RA3 TA3 RB2 TB2 RA2 TA2

LEN003

LEN002

160

Rev.1.1 90158-11

SN610/708/709/712/741 ATTCON (DLC)

(2)

SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON Standard Line (PN-8DLC/PN-4DLC)

MDF Cross Connection for SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON (Standard Line)


PIM0 LTC0 PN-8DLC R0 LEN000 (No. 0) T0 R1 LEN001 (No. 1) T1 J 1 26 2 27 P 1 26 2 27 MDF ROSETTE TO SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON

LT00


LEN006 (No. 6)


R6 T6 R7


7 32 8 33


7 32 8 33

MODULAR CONNECTOR

LEN007

(No. 7)

T7

LTC0 (J) LEN000 LEN001 LEN006 LEN007 1 2 7 8 R0 R1 R6 R7 26 27 32 33 T0 T1 T6 T7 26 27 32 33

LTC0 (P) T0 T1 T6 T7 1 2 7 8 R0 R1 R6 R7

161

Rev.1.1 90158-11

SN610/708/709/712/741 ATTCON (DLC)

Long Line (PN-2DLCB/PN-2DLCN)

MDF Cross Connection for SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON (Long Line)


PIM0 LTC0 PN-2DLCB/PN-2DLCN R0 LEN000 (No. 0) T0 R1 LEN001 (No. 1) T1 LT00 3 28 4 29 3 28 4 29 MODULAR CONNECTOR 27 27 J 1 26 2 P 1 26 2 MDF ROSETTE TO SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON

LTC0 (J) LEN000 LEN001 1 2 3 4 R0 R1 26 27 28 29 T0 T1 26 27 28 29

LTC0 (P) T0 T1 1 2 3 4 R0 R1

162

Rev.1.1 90158-11

SN610/708/709/712/741 ATTCON (DLC)

ATTENTION

(3)

Installation of SN610/708/709/712/741 ATTCON

Contents Static Sensitive


Handling Precautions Required

STEP1: To provide the console with the headset in place of the handset, unplug the modular cord from the handset and then plug the modular cord to the Jack Set.

Jack Set Installation for SN610/708/709/712/741 ATTCON

SN610/708/709/712/741 ATTCON

MODULAR CORD

JACK SET

163

Rev.1.1 90158-11

SN610/708/709/712/741 ATTCON (DLC)

ATTENTION
Contents Static Sensitive
Handling Precautions Required

STEP2: Set the switch located inside the console according to the type of headset/handset connected. Refer to next page. page 165

Switch Setting on the SN610/708/709/712/741 ATTCON


Slide the directory out of the way. Then insert a at screw drivers blade into the notched opening and apply light upward pressure until the access panel is clear of the front lip. At the same time apply pressure (toward you) at the rear of the pedestal to move the access panel.

ACCESS PANEL

DIRECTORY

Continued on next page

164

Rev.1.1 90158-11

SN610/708/709/712/741 ATTCON (DLC)

ATTENTION
Contents Static Sensitive
Handling Precautions Required

Switch Setting on SN610/708/709/712/741 ATTCON


Set the switch according to the type of headset/handset connected. C: Carbon Type Handset/Headset S: SUPRA Headset D: Dterm Type Handset Replace the directory and access panel.

SWITCH D

165

Rev.1.1 90158-11

SN610/708/709/712/741 ATTCON (DLC)

ATTENTION
Contents Static Sensitive
Handling Precautions Required

STEP3: Plug the line cord into the modular jack located at the bottom of the console. For the MDF cross connection refer to the following; SN610 ATTCON ( page 158) SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON ( page 161)

Cable Connection to SN610/708/709/712/741 ATTCON


LINE CORD

MODULAR TERMINAL 1P 1P

PBX MDF 1P DLC

SN708/709/712/741 ATTCON MODULAR TERMINAL 2P 2P PBX MDF 2P 2DLCC/ 4DLCF

SN610 ATTCON

166

Rev.1.1 90158-11

SN610/708/709/712/741 ATTCON (DLC)

ATTENTION
Contents Static Sensitive
Handling Precautions Required

STEP4: Screw the handset support onto the bottom of the console as shown below.

Mounting of Handset Support to SN610/708/709/712 ATTCON

HANDSET SUPPORT

SN610/708/709/712 ATTCON

167

Rev.1.1 90158-11

SN610/708/709/712/741 ATTCON (DLC)

ATTENTION
Contents Static Sensitive
Handling Precautions Required

For SN741 ATTCON, use the modular cord cramp provided with the handset support to dispose the straight part of the handset modular cord as shown below.

Mounting of Handset Support to SN741 ATTCON

MODULAR CORD CRAMP

SN741 ATTCON

HANDSET SUPPORT

MODULAR CORD

167-1

Rev.1.1 90158-11

THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY.

167-2

Rev.1.1 90158-11

Day/Night Mode Change by External Key (DK/MP)

Day/Night Mode Change by External Key (DK/MP)


MDF Cross Connection for Day/Night Mode Change by External Key
When using PN-DK00
PIM0 LTC0 PN-DK00 K0 K1 LEN000 K2 K3 LT00 K4 K5 LEN002 K6 K7 4 29 4 29 K6 K7 3 28 3 28 K4 K5 2 27 2 27 K2 K3 J 1 26 P 1 26 MDF TO KEYS K0 K1

LTC0 (J) LEN000 LEN002 1 2 3 4 K0 K2 K4 K6 26 27 28 29 K1 K3 K5 K7 26 27 28 29

LTC0 (P) K1 K3 K5 K7 1 2 3 4 K0 K2 K4 K6

When using DK on PN-CP14


PBX External Key PN-CP14

168
90168-10

External TAS Indicator (DK)

External TAS Indicator (DK)


(1) Connection Outline

External TAS Indicator Connection Outline


When using PN-DK00
PBX PN-DK00 MDF IND TAS Indicator with Battery

PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 G G

PBX PN-DK00 MDF

TAS Indicator with Battery (Ground Start) IND

169

Rev.1.1 90169-11

External TAS Indicator (DK)

(2)

MDF Cross Connection When using a TAS Indicator with a Battery

MDF Cross Connection for TAS Indicator with Battery


PIM0 LTC0 PN-DK00 K0 K1 LEN000 K2 K3 LT00 K4 K5 LEN002 K6 K7 4 29 4 29 3 28 3 28 2 27 2 27 J 1 26 P 1 26 MDF K0 TAS INDICATOR WITH BATTERY IND

PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 27V G

LTC0 (J) LEN000 LEN002 1 2 3 4 K0 K2 K4 K6 26 27 28 29 K1 K3 K5 K7 26 27 28 29

LTC0 (P) K1 K3 K5 K7 1 2 3 4 K0 K2 K4 K6

170

Rev.1.1 90169-11

External TAS Indicator (DK)

When using a TAS Indicator with a Battery (Ground Start)

MDF Cross Connection for TAS Indicator with Battery (Ground Start)
PIM0 LTC0 PN-DK00 K0 K1 LEN000 K2 K3 LT00 K4 K5 LEN002 K6 K7 4 29 4 29 3 28 3 28 2 27 2 27 J 1 26 P 1 26 MDF K0 TAS INDICATOR WITH BATTERY (GROUND START)

IND

LTC0 (J) LEN000 LEN002 1 2 3 4 K0 K2 K4 K6 26 27 28 29 K1 K3 K5 K7 26 27 28 29

LTC0 (P) K1 K3 K5 K7 1 2 3 4 K0 K2 K4 K6

171

Rev.1.1 90169-11

Paging Equipment (COT and DK/MP)

Paging Equipment (COT and DK/MP)


(1) Requirement for Customer-owned Paging Equipment Input Impedance : 600 ohm Control Method : Start - Ground Start NOTE Stop - Ground Off (Open) The current capacity of relay contact (PN-DK00 card) is 0.125A.

NOTE: (2)

Connection Outline

Paging Equipment Connection Outline


When using PN-8COT and PN-DK00
PBX For Amplifier Input PN-8COT MDF Paging Equipment

PN-DK00

For Control

PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126

G G

Continued on next page

172

Rev.1.1 90172-11

Paging Equipment (COT and DK/MP)

Paging Equipment Connection Outline


When using PN-8COT and DK on PN-CP14
PBX For Amplifier Input PN-8COT MDF Paging Equipment

PN-CP14 For Control

PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126

G G

173

Rev.1.1 90172-11

Paging Equipment (COT and DK/MP)

(3)

MDF Cross Connection

MDF Cross Connection for Paging Equipment


PIM0 PN-DK00 K0 K1 LEN000 K2 K3 LT00 K4 K5 LEN002 K6 K7 PN-8COT R0 LEN008 (No. 0) T0 9 34 9 34 PAGING EQUIPMENT G CONTROL CIRCUIT SPEAKER 2 27 3 28 4 29 2 27 3 28 4 29 J 1 26 LTC0 P 1 26 MDF

LT01 LEN014


(No. 6)


R6 T6 R7


15 40 16 41


15 40 16 41

Ring Tip

LEN015

(No. 7)

T7

SPEECH PATH CIRCUIT G

PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 G

LTC0 (J) LEN000 LEN002 1 2 3 4 9 10 14 15 K0 26 27 28 29 34 35 40 41 T0 T1 T6 T7 26 27 28 29 34 35 40 41

LTC0 (P) 1 2 3 4 T0 T1 T6 T7 9 10 14 15 K0

LEN008 LEN009 LEN015 LEN016

R0 R1 R6 R7

R0 R1 R6 R7

174

Rev.1.1 90172-11

External Tone Source/Announcement Machine (DK/TNT/MP)

External Tone Source/Announcement Machine (DK/TNT/MP)


(1) Requirement for Customer-owned External Tone Source/Announcement Machine Output level : Less than 0dbm (Adjustable) Output impedance : Less than 1 kohms (When using PN-4COT/8COT and PN-DK00) : Less than 10 kohms (When using Pin Jacks on PN-TNTA) Control Method : Start - Ground Start NOTE1 : Stop - Ground Off (Open)

NOTE1: The current capacity of relay contact (PN-DK00 card) is 0.125A. NOTE2: When connecting the external tone source/announcement machine using the PN4COT/8COT and PN-DK00 cards, an appropriate diode must be installed on the MDF, as shown on the next page. page 176

175
90175-11

External Tone Source/Announcement Machine (DK/TNT/MP)

(2)

Connection Outline

External Tone Source/Announcement Machine Connection Outline


When using PN-8COT and PN-DK00
PBX PN-8COT MDF External Tone Source/Announcement Machine

Diode * PN-DK00

* Rating for the Diode VR Less than 50V IO More than 20mA VF Less than 1.0V

When using Pin Jacks on PN-TNTA


PBX PN-TNTA JACK0 External Tone Source/Announcement Machine

External Tone Source/Announcement Machine

JACK1

When using Pin Jack on PN-CP14


PBX PN-CP14 External Tone Source/Announcement Machine

JACK

176
90175-11

External Tone Source/Announcement Machine (DK/TNT/MP)

(3)

MDF Cross Connection

MDF Cross Connection for External Tone Source/Announcement Machine


PIM0 PN-DK00 K0 K1 LEN000 K2 K3 LT00 K4 K5 LEN002 K6 K7 PN-8COT R0 LEN008 (No. 0) T0 9 34 9 34 EXTERNAL TONE SOURCE/ ANNOUNCEMENT MACHINE K0 G CONTROL CIRCUIT 2 27 3 28 4 29 2 27 3 28 4 29 J 1 26 LTC0 P 1 26 MDF

LT01


LEN014 (No. 6)


R6 T6 R7


15 40 16 41


15 40 16 41

Ring Tip

LEN015

(No. 7)

T7

SPEECH PATH CIRCUIT

PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 G

Continued on next page

177

Rev.1.1 90175-11

External Tone Source/Announcement Machine (DK/TNT/MP)

MDF Cross Connection for External Tone Source/Announcement Machine


LTC0 (J) LEN000 LEN002 1 2 3 4 9 10 14 15 K0 26 27 28 29 34 35 40 41 T0 T1 T6 T7 26 27 28 29 34 35 40 41 T0 T1 T6 T7 LTC0 (P) 1 2 3 4 9 10 14 15 K0

LEN008 LEN009 LEN015 LEN016

R0 R1 R6 R7

R0 R1 R6 R7

178
90175-11

External Tone Source/Announcement Machine (DK/TNT/MP)

If a D.C. voltage is supplied with the tone from the external tone source/announcement machine, a transformer or coupling capacitor should be used as shown below.

Connecting External Tone Source/Announcement Machine Supplied with D.C.


TRANSFORMER CAPACITOR 2F SOURCE R TO COT TO PBX Tip DC VOLTAGE SOURCE

Ring

TO CONTROL CIRCUIT FROM PN-DK00

EXTERNAL TONE SOURCE/ ANNOUNCEMENT MACHINE

Ring

CAPACITOR 2F

SOURCE

R TO COT TO PBX Tip DC VOLTAGE SOURCE

TO CONTROL CIRCUIT FROM PN-DK00

EXTERNAL TONE SOURCE/ ANNOUNCEMENT MACHINE

179
90175-11

External BGM Source (COT/TNT/MP)

External BGM Source (COT/TNT/MP)


The system can connect a maximum of 10 customer-owned BGM sources. (1) Connection Outline

External BGM Sources Connection Outline


When using PN-8COT
PN-8COT MDF BGM SOURCE

#0 BGM SOURCE BGM SOURCE

#1

When using Pin Jacks on PN-TNTA


PN-TNTA BGM SOURCE

JACK0

#0 BGM SOURCE BGM SOURCE

JACK1

#1

When using Pin Jack on PN-CP14


PN-CP14 BGM SOURCE

JACK

180
90180-10

External BGM Source (COT/TNT/MP)

(2)

MDF Cross Connection When using PN-8COT

MDF Cross Connection for External BGM Sources


PIM0 LTC0 PN-8COT R0 LEN000 (No. 0) T0 R1 LEN001 (No. 1) T1 27 27 J 1 26 2 P 1 26 2 MDF BGM SOURCE #0 BGM SOURCE #1 #0

LT00


LEN006 (No. 6)


R6 T6 R7


7 32 8 33


7 32 8 33

LEN007

(No. 7)

T7

LTC0 (J) LEN000 LEN001 LEN006 LEN007 1 2 7 8 R0 R1 R6 R7 26 27 32 33 T0 T1 T6 T7 26 27 32 33

LTC0 (P) T0 T1 T6 T7 1 2 7 8 R0 R1 R6 R7

181
90180-10

Power Failure Transfer (AUC)

Power Failure Transfer (AUC)


(1) Connection Outline

PFT Connection Outline (AUC)

PBX

TEL

MDF

MDF

TO C.O. LINE

PN-AUC

PN-4COT

182
90182-10

Power Failure Transfer (AUC)

(2)

MDF Cross Connection

MDF Cross Connection for PFT (AUC)


NOTE1: The No. 2 and No. 3 circuit in the PN-4COT card can not be used for PFT function. NOTE2: When using Ground Start trunks with PFT function, the single line stations must have a ground sending button and a ground lead must be run to the station.
PIM0 PN-4COT J LTC0 P MDF

C.O.R0 LEN000 (No. 0) C.O.T0 C.O.R1 LEN001 (No. 1) LT00 04 03 02 01 CN1 PN-AUC 4Q-TW-0.3 CONN CA C.O.T1

1 26 2 27 3 28 4 29

1 26 2 27 3 28 4 29

Ring Tip Ring Tip

TO C.O. LINE TO C.O. LINE

Sta. R0 LEN008 (No. 0) Sta. T0 Sta. R1 LEN009 (No. 1) Sta. T1

9 34 10 35

9 34 10 35

Ring Tip Ring Tip

TO STATION TO STATION

LT01 04 03 02 01 CN1

Continued on next page


183
90182-10

Power Failure Transfer (AUC)

MDF Cross Connection for PFT (AUC)


LTC0 (J) LEN000 LEN001 1 C.O.R0 26 C.O.T0 2 C.O.R1 27 C.O.T1 LTC0 (P) 26 C.O.T0 1 C.O.R0 27 C.O.T1 2 C.O.R1

LEN008 LEN009

9 Sta.R0 34 Sta.T0 10 Sta.R1 35 Sta.T1 11 36 12 37

34 Sta.T0 9 Sta.R0 35 Sta.T1 10 Sta.R1 36 11 37 12

184
90182-10

Power Failure Transfer (8PFT)

Power Failure Transfer (8PFT)


(1) Connection Outline

PFT Connection Outline (8PFT)


PZ-8PFTB

PBX

TEL

MDF

MDF

PN-8LC NOTE

PN-8COT

MDF

MDF

TO C.O. LINE

NOTE:

Using the PN-AUCA card (long line card) instead of the PN-8LC card is not recommended due to the variations from Central Office to the PBX; line quality cannot be assured.

185
90185-11

Power Failure Transfer (8PFT)

(2)

Installation of PZ-8PFTB

STEP1: Mount the PZ-8PFTB card into the PFT slot of the PIM. STEP2: Connect the champ connectors of 25-pair cables to the PFT0 and PFT1 connectors on the PZ-8PFTB card as shown below.

Connection of 25-Pair Cable and PZ-8PFTB


PFT1 CONNECTOR CHAMP CONNECTOR ATTACHED TO PZ-8PFTB

PZ-8PFTB

PFT0 CONNECTOR

25-PAIR CABLE

To MDF (SEE STEP3)

page 187

186
90185-11

Power Failure Transfer (8PFT)

STEP3: Connect the 25-pair cables on the MDF. This gure shows the PFT connector pin assignment for each PFT circuit number (No. 0 - No. 7).

PFT Connector Pin Assignment


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 PFT0 Sta. R0 26 8LC. R0 27 C.O. R0 28 8COT. R0 29 Sta. R1 30 8LC. R1 31 C.O. R1 32 8COT. R1 33 Sta. R2 34 8LC. R2 35 C.O. R2 36 8COT. R2 37 Sta. R3 38 8LC. R3 39 C.O. R3 40 8COT. R3 41 Sta. R4 42 8LC. R4 43 C.O. R4 44 8COT. R4 45 Sta. R5 46 8LC. R5 47 C.O. R5 48 8COT. R5 49 50 Sta. T0 8LC. T0 C.O. T0 8COT. T0 Sta. T1 8LC. T1 C.O. T1 8COT. T1 Sta. T2 8LC. T2 C.O. T2 8COT. T2 Sta. T3 8LC. T3 C.O. T3 8COT. T3 Sta. T4 8LC. T4 C.O. T4 8COT. T4 Sta. T5 8LC. T5 C.O. T5 8COT. T5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 PFT1 Sta. R6 26 8LC. R6 27 C.O. R6 28 8COT. R6 29 Sta. R7 30 8LC. R7 31 C.O. R7 32 8COT. R7 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Sta. T6 8LC. T6 C.O. T6 8COT. T6 Sta. T7 8LC. T7 C.O. T7 8COT. T7

No. 0

No. 6

No. 1

No. 7

No. 2

No. 3

No. 4

No. 5

E 27V

187
90185-11

Power Failure Transfer (8PFT)

This gure shows MDF cross connection for No. 0 circuit on the PZ-8PFTB.

MDF Cross Connection for PFT (8PFT)


MDF Tip Ring Tip Ring PIM0 PN-8LC LEN000 (No. 0) LEN001 (No. 1) LT00 R0 T0 R1 T1 LTC0 J P 1 1 26 26 2 27 2 27 TO C.O. LINE TO STATION PZ-8PFTB PFT0 Sta. R0 Sta. T0 8LC. R0 8LC. T0 1 26


LEN007 (No. 7)


R7 T7


8 33


8 33

2 27 No. 0

C.O. R0 C.O. T0 8COT. R0 8COT. T0

3 28

PN-8COT R0 LEN008 T0 (No. 0) LEN009 (No. 1) LT01 R1 T1

9 34 10 35

9 34 10 35

4 29


LEN015 (No. 7)


R7 T7


16 41


16 41

PFT1

PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 27V G 24 49 25 50

27V J

P INSTALLATION CABLE

Continued on next page

188

Rev.1.1 90185-11

Power Failure Transfer (8PFT)

MDF Cross Connection for PFT (8PFT)


1 PFT0 CONNECTOR PFT0 (J) 1 2 3 4 Sta. R0 8LC. R0 C.O. R0 8COT. R0 26 27 28 29 Sta. T0 8LC. T0 C.O. T0 8COT. T0 26 27 28 29 PFT0 (P) Sta. T0 8LC. T0 C.O. T0 8COT. T0 1 2 3 4 Sta. R0 8LC. R0 C.O. R0 8COT. R0 TO STATION TO PN-8LC TO C.O. LINE TO PN-8COT

PFT1 CONNECTOR PFT1 (J) PFT1 (P)

24 25

49 50

E 27V

49 50

E 27V

24 25

TO PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126

LTC0 CONNECTOR LTC0 (J) LEN000 1 2 3 4 9 10 11 12 R0 26 27 28 29 34 35 36 37 T0 26 27 28 29 34 35 36 37 LTC0 (P) T0 1 2 3 4 9 10 11 12 R0 TO PZ-8PFTB

LEN008

R0

T0

T0

R0

TO PZ-8PFTB

189

Rev.1.1 90185-11

Alarm Display Panel (MP)

Alarm Display Panel (MP)


MDF Cross Connection for Alarm Display Panel
ALARM DISPLAY PANEL PWR PIM0 LTC0 PN-CP14 MJ MN J 25 50 P FRONT 25 50 MDF MJ MIN

PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 27V G

REAR

LTC0 (J) 1 26 26

LTC0 (P) 1

25

MJ

50

MN

50

MN

25

MJ

190

Rev.1.1 90190-11

Built-in SMDR (MP)

Built-in SMDR (MP)


The MP card provides a RS-232C interface port for SMDR connection. No.0 Port : Async.: 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200bps Direct connection Connect the SMDR terminal to the RS 0 Port of the PN-CP14 card using the RS RVS-15(S) CA-A/RS RVS-4(S) CA-A/RS RVS-4(S) CA-C as shown below.

SMDR Terminal Direct Connection


PBX

PN-CP14

RS 0

TO RS-232C PORT RS RVS-15(S) CA-A: 15m (49.2ft.) RS RVS-4(S) CA-A/RS RVS-4(S) CA-C: 4m (13.1ft.) 15m (49.2ft.) MAX. SMDR

Connection via MODEM When the cable length between the PBX and the terminal is more than 15m (49.2ft.), connect the SMDR terminal to the RS0 Port of the PN-CP14 card through the MODEMs using the RS NORM-4(S) CA-A as shown below.

SMDR Terminal Connection via MODEMs


PBX PN-CP14 MODEM 2P RS 0 TO RS-232C PORT SMDR MODEM

RS NORM-4 CA-A/ RS NORM-4S CA-A: 4m (13.1ft.) MORE THAN 15m (49.2ft.)

MODEM INTERFACE CABLE (STRAIGHT)

191
90191-11

Built-in SMDR (MP)

RS RVS-15 CA-A/RS RVS-15S CA-A RS RVS-4 CA-A/RS RVS-4 CA-C RS RVS-4S CA-A/RS RVS-4S CA-C
NOTE: If the SMDR terminal does not send DTR or RTS signal, cut the signal lead marked by X in the D-Sub connector (SMDR terminal side) as shown in the wiring diagram below. See RS-232C Connector Layout. page 198

RS RVS-15 CA-A/RS RVS-15S CA-A: 15m (49.2ft.) MAX. RS RVS-4 CA-A/RS RVS-4 CA-C/ RS RVS-4S CA-A/RS RVS-4S CA-C: 4m (13.1ft.) MAX. 06D-TXC (1) 06B-RXC 06A-TXC (2) 06A-TXC (2) 05B-GND 05A-TXD 04B-RXD 04A-RTS 03B-CTS 03A-DSR 02B-GND 02A-DCD 01C-LALB X NOTE X 15-TXC (2) 17-RXC 24-TXC (1) 06-DSR 01-GND 03-RXD 02-TXD 08-DCD 05-CTS 20-DTR 07-GND 04-RTS 18-LALB

13 12 11 10 D 06 TXC (1) 05 04 03 02 01 X (RT) X ---X C X DTR X (ST) X LALB B RXC GND RXD CTS GND X A TXC (2) TXD RTS DSR DCD G G: GROUND 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01

---25 ---24 ---23 ---22 ---21 DCD 20 GND 19 DSR 18 CTS 17 RTS 16 RXD 15 TXD 14 GND ---TXC (2) ---RXC LALB ---DTR ---------TXC (1) ----

192

Rev.1.1 90191-11

Built-in SMDR (MP)

RS NORM-4 CA-A/RS NORM-4S CA-A


See RS-232C Connector Layout.

page 198

4m (13.1ft.) MAX.

06D-TXC (1) 06B-RXC 06A-TXC (2) 05C-DTR 05B-GND 05A-TXD 04B-RXD 04A-RTS 03B-CTS 03A-DSR 02B-GND 02A-DCD 01C-LALB

24-TXC (1) 17-RXC 15-TXC (2) 20-DTR 01-GND 02-TXD 03-RXD 04-RTS 05-CTS 06-DSR 07-GND 08-DCD 18-LALB

D 06 TXC (1) 05 04 03 02 01 X (RT) X ---X

C X DTR X (ST) X LALB

B RXC GND RXD CTS GND X

A TXC (2) TXD RTS DSR DCD G G: GROUND

13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01

---25 ---24 ---23 ---22 ---21 DCD 20 GND 19 DSR 18 CTS 17 RTS 16 RXD 15 TXD 14 GND ---TXC (2) ---RXC LALB ---DTR ---------TXC (1) ----

193
90191-11

SMDR/PMS/MCI/CIS Printer/Hotel Printer (AP00)

SMDR/PMS/MCI/CIS Printer/Hotel Printer (AP00)


The PN-AP00-B card provides 4 RS-232C interface ports for SMDR, PMS, MCI, CIS Printer, Hotel Printer. (1) SMDR/PMS/MCI (VMS) Direct Connection Connect the terminal to the RS0-RS3 port of the PN-AP00-B card using the RS RVS-15(S) CA-A/RS RVS-4(S) CA-A/RS RVS-4(S) CA-C as shown below. See page 192 also.

SMDR/PMS/MCI Terminal Direct Connection


PBX (PIM0 - PIM7) RS0 - RS3 PNAP00-B TO RS-232C PORT SMDR0/SMDR1/ PMS/MCI (VMS)

RS RVS-15(S) CA-A : 15m (49.2ft.) RS RVS-4(S) CA-A/RS RVS-4(S) CA-C: 4m (13.1ft.)

15m (49.2ft.) MAX.

194
90194-10

SMDR/PMS/MCI/CIS Printer/Hotel Printer (AP00)

Connection via MODEM When the cable length between the PBX and the terminal is more than 15m (49.2ft), MODEMs are required. Use RS RORM-4(S) CA-A as shown below. See page 193 also.

SMDR/PMS/MCI Terminal Connection via MODEMs


INTERFACE CABLE (FOR STRAIGHT CONNECTION) PBX (PIM0 - PIM7) RS0 - RS3 2P PNAP00-B RS NORM-4 CA-A/ RS NORM-4S CA-A: 4m (13.1ft.) MODEM MODEM TO RS-232C PORT SMDR0/SMDR1/ PMS/MCI (VMS)

MORE THAN 15m (49.2ft.) MODEM: FULL DUPLEX (4W) 1200BPS (LEASED TYPE)

195
90194-10

SMDR/PMS/MCI/CIS Printer/Hotel Printer (AP00)

(2)

CIS Printer/Hotel Printer Direct Connection Connect a maximum of two printers to the PN-AP00-B using the RS PRT-15(S) CA-A as shown below.

Printer Direct Connection


PBX RS0-RS3 CONNECTOR PNAP00-B RS PRT-15 CA-A/ RS PRT-15S CA-A : 15m (49.2ft.) PRINTER0/PRINTER1

MAX. 15m (49.2ft.)

Connection via MODEM When the cable length between the printer and the PBX is more than 15m (49.2ft.), MODEMs are required.

Printer Connection via MODEMs


INTERFACE CABLE (FOR STRAIGHT CONNECTION)

PBX RS0-RS3 CONNECTOR PNAP00-B MODEM RS NORM-4 CA-A/ RS NORM-4S CA-A : 4m (13.1ft.) MODEM PRINTER0/PRINTER1

2P

MORE THAN 15m (49.2ft.) MODEM: FULL DUPLEX (4W) 1200BPS (LEASED TYPE)

196
90194-10

SMDR/PMS/MCI/CIS Printer/Hotel Printer (AP00)

RS PRT-15 CA-A/RS PRT-15S CA-A


See RS-232C Connector Layout.

page 198

MAX. 15m (49.2ft.)

05C-DTR 05B-GND 05A-TXD 03B-CTS 03A-DSR 01-GND 03-RXD 20-DTR

02B-GND

07-GND

D 06 05 04 03 02 01 TXC (1) X (RT) X ---X

C X DTR X (ST) X LALB

B RXC GND RXD CTS GND X

A TXC (2) TXD RTS DSR DCD G G: GROUND

13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01

------------------GND ---------RXD ---GND 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 ---------------DTR -------------------

197
90194-10

SMDR/PMS/MCI/CIS Printer/Hotel Printer (AP00)

RS-232C Connector Layout


SIGNAL-NAME PIN SIGNAL NO. RS-232C JIS C6361 ITU-T ANOTHER DIRECTION V.24
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 SCA CD CG CE CI, CH DA BRS ER SQD CI SRS ST1 120 108/2 110 125 112, 111 113 TXC (1) RI DTR DTE DTE DCE DCE DCE SCF SCB SBA DB SBB DD PB BCD BCS BSD ST2 BRD RT 122 121 118 114 119 115 RXC TXC (2) DCE DCE DTE DCE DCE DCE AA BA BB CA CB CC AB CF (FG) SD RD RS CS DR SG CD 101 103 104 105 106 107 102 109 GND TXD RXD RTS CTS DSR GND DCD DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE DCE Send Data Receive Data Request to Send Clear to Send Data Set Ready Signal Ground Data Channel Receive Carrier Detect Not Used Not Used Peripheral Busy Backward Channel Receive Carrier Detect Backward Channel Send (OK) Backward Channel Send Data Send Signal Element Timing Backward Channel Receive Data Receive Signal Element Timing Not Used Backward Channel Send Detect Data Terminal Ready Data Signal Quality Detect Call Indication Data Signal Speed Choice Send Signal Element Timing Not Used

MEANING
Frame Ground

198
90194-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
MOUNTING OF CIRCUIT CARDS

MOUNTING CIRCUIT CARDS


(1) Before mounting the circuit cards, conrm the following items.
ATTENTION
Contents Static Sensitive
Handling Precautions Required

Wrist Strap is connected to Frame Ground. Switch settings of circuit cards are already completed. see CHAPTER 3. The SW1 switches of all PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 cards are turned off. (2)

page 207

Mount circuit cards into their mounting positions according to the Bay Face Layout and Port Assignment Table given in the Ofce Data Progrmming Manual. see CHAPTER 1 MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARD. page 29 This gure shows the mounting method of circuit cards.

Mounting of Circuit Cards

TO FRAME GROUND CONNECTION

(
WRIST STRAP

page 39)

CARD LABEL CARD CONTACT SIDE CARD FRONT SIDE

199

Rev.1.1 90199-11

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
MOUNTING OF CIRCUIT CARDS

(3)

Fix the CARD STOPPER according to the following procedure.

STEP1: After mounting all circuit cards slide the CARD STOPPER to the left. STEP2: Tighten the screws of the CARD STOPPER as shown below. NOTE: When sliding the PIM CARD STOPPER, loosen all of the screws securing the PIM CARD STOPPER and the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card (the screws need not to be removed).

Installation of the CARD STOPPER


CIRCUIT CARD

CARD STOPPER

CIRCUIT CARD

SCREW

SCREW

SLIDE THE CARD STOPPER TO THE LEFT.

CARD STOPPER

200
90199-11

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SYSTEM INITIALIZATION

SYSTEM INITIALIZATION
There are two methods for System Initialization. The rst method is to Clear All Data, except LEN000 as a CAT terminal, and then program the System Data. The second method is to use the Resident System Program, which causes the system to congure itself automatically to the default settings, wherever the line/ trunk cards are installed.
ATTENTION
Contents Static Sensitive
Handling Precautions Required

NOTE1: See CHAPTER 3 for MP switch settings. page 210 NOTE2: Refer to the Command Manual for default settings on the Resident System Program.

All Clear, Except LEN000 CAT


STEP1: Turn on the SW1 switch on all the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 cards. - The ON lamp must be lit on all the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 cards. STEP2: On the MP Card, set SW3 to B and press SW1. STEP3: When the MN lamp on the system is lit, set SW3 to the 0 position and press SW1. - The operating mode has been changed to the ON LINE mode.

Resident System Program


STEP1: Mount the line/trunk cards into PIM. STEP2: Turn on the SW1 switch on all the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 cards. - The ON lamp must be lit on all the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 cards. STEP3: On the MP card, set SW3 to C and press SW1. - After 30 to 40 seconds, the MN lamp turns on. - The system has loaded the Resident System Program. NOTE: If the MJ lamp is lit, repeat Step 3.

STEP4: On the MP card, set SW3 to the 0 position and press SW1. - The operating mode has been changed to the ON LINE mode.

201

Rev.1.1 90201-11

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SYSTEM DATA ENTRY

SYSTEM DATA ENTRY


There are two methods for data entry, using a Customer Administration Terminal (CAT) or a Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT). NOTE: For assigning system data, refer to the Command Manual.
ATTENTION
Contents Static Sensitive
Handling Precautions Required

CAT
Any Dterm can be assigned as a CAT through programming. The Dterm can still be used as a regular telephone when it is not in CAT mode. If the system is initialized by C (Resident System Program), every Dterm will be able to go into CAT mode. If the system is initialized by B (All Clear), only LEN000 is assigned as a CAT port (the DLC card must be installed in slot LT00). To use a Dterm as a CAT, follow the procedures shown below. NOTE: It is necessary to complete steps 1 through 6 within 4 seconds.

To set CAT mode: 1. 2. Press TRF or Transfer Press CNF or Conf - CNF/Conf lamp ashes Press * - CNF/Conf lamp is off Press TRF or Transfer Press CNF or Conf - CNF/Conf lamp ashes Press # - CNF/Conf, SPKR/Speaker, FNC/Feature lamps are lit - CAT MODE is displayed on the LCD Press LNR/SPD or Redial - COMMAND = - is displayed on the LCD

3.

4. 5.

6.

7.

202
90202-11

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SYSTEM DATA ENTRY

To reset CAT mode: While COMMAND = - is displayed on the LCD:


ATTENTION

1.

Lift the handset (off hook) - SPKR/Speaker lamp turns off. Restore the handset (on hook) - CNF/Conf, FNC/Feature lamps turn off. - LCD returns to clock.

Contents Static Sensitive


Handling Precautions Required

2.

MAT
Refer to the MATWorX User Guide.

Corming Lamp Indication


After system data entry, conrm proper operation of the system using indicator lamps. RUN Lamp Flashing (120 IPM) Check that the RUN lamps of PN-CP14 card and other application circuit cards are ashing. ON Lamps of All PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 cards Lightning Check that the ON lamps of all the PZ-PW121/PZ-PW126 cards are lightning and their MJ/ MN lamps have gone out. BL Lamps Gone Out Check that the BL lamps of all the line/trunk circuit cards have gone out. If BL lamps are ashing, it means that the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state or the system data for this card is not assigned. For more details of lamp indication, see CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS. For information of maintenance servicing and troubleshooting of the equipment, refer to the Maintenance Manual.

203

Rev.1.1 90202-11

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
OPERATION TEST

OPERATION TEST
Conrm the entered system data and hardware, including cable connection, by completing the following operational tests. Basic Connection Test at MDF Station Line Test (Operator Call from all stations) Central Ofce Trunk Test (Incoming, Outgoing) Tie Line Trunk Test (Incoming, Outgoing) Service Feature Test Call Transfer Step Call Executive Right of Way (Executive Override) Call Hold Call Back Call Forwarding-All Calls/Dont Answer (No Answer)/Busy Line Call Pickup Station Hunting-Pilot/Circular Speed Calling-Station/System (Station Speed Dial/System Speed Dial) Paging Access (External Paging with Meet-me) Announcement Service Other selected features NOTE: Feature names in the parenthesis are for North America.

204
90204-10

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SYSTEM DATA SAVE / CLEANING AND VISUAL CHECK

SYSTEM DATA SAVE


After system data entry, save the system data to oppy diskette. Refer to MATWorX Users Guide for the operation of system data save.

CLEANING AND VISUAL CHECK


Cleaning
Clean the following places: Inside of the main equipment, especially the bottom of the base. On the Top Cover. Around the Main Equipment and the MDF. Keyboard on the Attendant Console.

Visual Check
(1) (2) (3) Check to see if all circuit cards are in their positions correctly. Check that the cable connections in the PIM are correctly and completely connected, and the routing of the cables has been done smoothly and neatly. Check to see if the MAT is removed.

205
90205-10

THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY.

206
90206-10

CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS

CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS

This chapter explains the meaning of lamp indications and the method of switch settings of each circuit card used in the system.

HOW TO READ THIS CHAPTER .............................................. CONTROL CARD ...................................................................... APPLICATION PROCESSOR CARD ........................................ LINE/TRUNK CARD ..................................................................

208 209 224 321

207
90207-10

CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS


HOW TO READ THIS CHAPTER

HOW TO READ THIS CHAPTER


This chapter explains each circuit card used in this system about the following items. Explanations are given in alphabetical order of the circuit card names within each circuit card category (Control, Application Processor, and Line/Trunk). (1) Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The locations of lamps, switches, and connectors of each circuit card are shown by a face layout. (2) Lamp Indications The name, color, and functions of each indicator lamp equipped on each circuit card are described in a table. (3) Switch Settings The name, settings, and functions of each switch equipped on each circuit card are described in a table. Each switch setting table has a CHECK column. Make necessary entries in the CHECK column during and/or after the system installation and maintenance, and use each table as a reference for subsequent system maintenance and operations.

208
90208-10

CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS


CONTROL CARD

CONTROL CARD
The table below shows the control cards to be explained in this section.

List of Control Cards


EXTRACTION/ INSERTION WITH POWER ON X: ALLOWED : ALLOWED AFTER MB* : NOT ALLOWED

NAME (FUNCTIONAL NAME)

LAMP X: PROVIDED : NOT PROVIDED

SWITCH X: PROVIDED : NOT PROVIDED

REFERENCE PAGE

PN-CP14 (MP) PN-CP15 (FP) PN-PW00 (EXTPWR) PZ-PW121 (AC/DC PWR) PZ-PW126 (AC/DC PWR) PZ-PW122 (DC/DC PWR) *MB = Make Busy

X X X X X X

X X X X X X

page 210 page 215 page 217

page 219 page 221-1 page 222

209

Rev.1.1 90209-11

PN-CP14 (MP)

PN-CP14 (MP)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SW3 SW4 RUN SW1 SW2 JACK VR CLK DK JP1 RS1 JP0 RS0

CONN

CONN: To CONNR connector on PZ-M537 (EXPMEM)

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
RUN CLK

COLOR
Green Green

FUNCTION
Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally. Remains lit while receiving clock signals to the PLO.

210
90210-10

PN-CP14 (MP)

Switch Settings

CAUTION
When the operating power is being supplied to this circuit card, do not plug/unplug this circuit card into/from its mounting slot.

SWITCH NAME
SW3 (Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


0

FUNCTION
On Line (Call processing is in progress) Off Line (Call processing is stopped) I/O port: As per CM40 YY=08 Off Line (Call processing is stopped) I/O port: 9600bps (Fixed) Off Line (Call processing is stopped) I/O port: 9600bps Off Line (Call processing is stopped) I/O port: 19200bps Off Line (Call processing is stopped) I/O port: 38400bps Off Line (Call processing is stopped) I/O port: 57600bps For clearing the ofce data For setting the resident system program Not used

CHECK

2 3 5 NOTE2 0-F 6 NOTE2 7 NOTE2 8 NOTE2 B C 1, 4, 9 A, D-F

NOTE1

Continued on next page

NOTE1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position. NOTE2: Only when executing MP Program Download in MATWorX, set the SW3 to 5-8.

211
90210-10

PN-CP14 (MP)

SWITCH NAME
SW1 (Push SW)

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION

FUNCTION
For initializing CPU

CHECK

SW2 (Piano Key SW)


OFF 4 3 2 1 ON

ON OFF

A-law (Australia) -law (North America)

Selection of PLO0 input (Phase Locked Oscillator) For clock receiver ofce:

SW2-2 SW2-3
OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON

FUNCTION
1.5MHz clock [For PN-24DTA-C/PN-24PRTA] 192kHz clock [For PN-BRTA] 2MHz clock [For PN-30DTC-A/PN-2BRTC] Not used

2, 3

For clock source ofce: SW2-2 SW2-3 OFF OFF 4 ON OFF When using RS1 port for built-in MODEM When using RS1 port for RS-232C
Continued on next page

212
90210-10

PN-CP14 (MP)

SWITCH NAME
SW4 (Dip SW)
ON 1 2 3 4

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


1 2 OFF OFF Not used Not used

FUNCTION

CHECK

Selection of PLO1 input (Phase Locked Oscillator) For clock receiver ofce:

SW4-3 SW4-4
OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON

FUNCTION
1.5MHz clock [For PN-24DTA-C/PN-24PRTA] 192kHz clock [For PN-BRTA] 2MHz clock [For PN-30DTC-A/PN-2BRTC] Not used

3, 4

For clock source ofce: SW4-3 SW4-4 OFF OFF VR (Rotary SW)
20 0

Variable Resister for External Hold Tone Source (0 - 20 Kohms : Clockwise)

DK (Connector)
02 01

02 01

Ground detection Ground sending


Continued on next page

213
90210-10

PN-CP14 (MP)

SWITCH NAME
JP0 (Jumper pin)

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


UP DOWN UP DOWN

FUNCTION
Not used (Memory backup OFF) For normal operation (Memory backup ON) For using internal tone source For using external tone source

CHECK

Front

JP1 (Jumper pin)

Front

The gure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the gure and , the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

214
90210-10

PN-CP15 (FP)

PN-CP15 (FP)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SENSE RUN MB

SW1

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
RUN

COLOR
Green

FUNCTION
Flashes at 120 IPM while the circuit card is operating normally.

215
90215-10

PN-CP15 (FP)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENSE (Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


For setting FP No. 0 0-3 1 2 3 4-F

FUNCTION

CHECK

For mounting this card in PIM0 For mounting this card in PIM2 For mounting this card in PIM4 For mounting this card in PIM6 Not used

0 1 2 3

NOTE1 MB (Toggle SW)


ON

UP

For make-busy For normal operation Not used

NOTE2 SW1 (Piano Key SW)


OFF 4 3 2 1 ON

DOWN

1-3

OFF For normal operation ON

4 OFF

Not used

The gure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the gure and , the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned. NOTE1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position. NOTE2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card.

216
90215-10

PN-PW00 (EXTPWR)

PN-PW00 (EXTPWR)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

08 07 06 05 RUN MB 04 03 02 01

48V 48V E E 48V 48V E E

CONN

TO DESKCON

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
RUN

COLOR
Green

FUNCTION
Remains lit while 48V power is being supplied

217
90217-10

PN-PW00 (EXTPWR)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
MB (Toggle SW)
ON

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


UP DOWN

FUNCTION
For make-busy (48V power off) For normal operation (48V power on)

CHECK

NOTE

The gure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the gure and , the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned. NOTE: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card.

218
90217-10

PZ-PW121 (AC/DC PWR)

PZ-PW121 (AC/DC PWR)


Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SW 301 SW 102 MJ MN ON CN103 (SIGNAL) MJ MN ON SW 101

CN104

BATT SW2

BATT

CN1

ON OFF SW 1

SW2

219
90219-10

PZ-PW121 (AC/DC PWR)

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
MJ MN ON

COLOR
Red Yellow Green

FUNCTION
Remains lit when a major trouble occurres or resident system program is not properly loaded Remains lit when a minor trouble occurres or resident system program is successfully loaded, or a station line is locked out Remains lit while the operating power is being supplied

Switch Settings

CAUTION
When the operating power is being supplied to this circuit card, do not plug/unplug this circuit card into/from its mounting slot.

SWITCH NAME
SW1
ON OFF

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


ON OFF

FUNCTION
For turning AC power and the battery on For turning AC power and the battery off

CHECK

SW2
100/120V AC 240V AC

FORWARD AC INPUT: 90V-132V BACKWARD AC INPUT: 180V-264V

SW101 (Piano key)


ON 1

OFF

Not used Float charging, for sealed batteries (Normal Setting). OPTION: Periodic Equalize charging of external vented batteries. Float charging, for vented batteries only.
Continued on next page

ON 2

2 OFF

OFF

220
90219-10

PZ-PW121 (AC/DC PWR)

SWITCH NAME
SW301 (Dip SW)
90V 1 OFF 2 25Hz 20Hz ON 75V

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


ON 1 OFF ON 2 OFF PRESS MOMENTARILY

FUNCTION
CR Voltage: 75Vrms CR Voltage: 90Vrms Frequency: 20Hz Frequency: 25Hz To start each PIM on battery power when AC power is not provided

CHECK

SW102

The gure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the gure and , the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

221
90219-10

PZ-PW126 (AC/DC PWR)

PZ-PW126 (AC/DC PWR)


Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

SW 301 SW 102 MJ MN ON CN103 (SIGNAL) MJ MN ON SW 101

CN104

BATT

BATT

CN1

ON OFF SW 1

221-1

Rev.1.1 90221A11

PZ-PW126 (AC/DC PWR)

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
MJ MN ON

COLOR
Red Yellow Green

FUNCTION
Remains lit when a major trouble occurres or resident system program is not properly loaded Remains lit when a minor trouble occurres or resident system program is successfully loaded, or a station line is locked out Remains lit while the operating power is being supplied

Switch Settings

CAUTION
When the operating power is being supplied to this circuit card, do not plug/unplug this circuit card into/from its mounting slot.

SWITCH NAME
SW1
ON OFF

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


ON OFF 1 OFF

FUNCTION
For turning AC power and the battery on For turning AC power and the battery off Not used Float charging, for sealed batteries (Normal Setting). OPTION: Periodic Equalize charging of external vented batteries. Float charging, for vented batteries only.

CHECK

SW101 (Piano key)


ON 1

ON 2

2 OFF

OFF

Continued on next page

221-2

Rev.1.1 90221A11

PZ-PW126 (AC/DC PWR)

SWITCH NAME
SW301 (Dip SW)
90V 1 OFF 2 25Hz 20Hz ON 75V

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


ON 1 OFF ON 2 OFF PRESS MOMENTARILY

FUNCTION
CR Voltage: 75Vrms CR Voltage: 90Vrms Frequency: 20Hz Frequency: 25Hz To start each PIM on battery power when AC power is not provided

CHECK

SW102

The gure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the gure and , the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

221-3

Rev.1.1 90221A11

THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY.

221-4

Rev.1.1 90221A11

PZ-PW122 (DC/DC PWR)

PZ-PW122 (DC/DC PWR)


Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

CONN SW CONN connector: To PWR1 connector on PIM BWB

ON

POWER OUTPUT CABLE (48V, E): To PWR0C connector on PIM BWB

222
90222-10

PZ-PW122 (DC/DC PWR)

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
ON

COLOR
Green

FUNCTION
Remains lit while the operating power is being supplied

Switch Settings

CAUTION
When the operating power is being supplied to this circuit card, do not plug/unplug this circuit card into/from its mounting slot.

SWITCH NAME
SW
ON OFF

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


ON OFF

FUNCTION
For turning AC power on For turning AC power off

CHECK

223
90222-10

CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS


APPLICATION PROCESSOR CARD

APPLICATION PROCESSOR CARD


The table below shows the application cards to be explained in this section.

List of Application Processor Cards


EXTRACTION/ INSERTION WITH POWER ON X: ALLOWED : ALLOWED AFTER MB* : NOT ALLOWED

NAME (FUNCTIONAL NAME)

LAMP X: PROVIDED : NOT PROVIDED

SWITCH X: PROVIDED : NOT PROVIDED

REFERENCE PAGE

PN-AP00-A (DBM) PN-AP00-B (AP00) PN-AP01 (AP01) PN-BRTA (BRT) PN-2BRTC (BRT) PN-2BRTK (BRT) PN-CC01 (ETHER) PN-DAIA (DAI) PN-DAIB (DAI) PN-DAIC (DAI) PN-DAID (DAI) PN-DAIE (DAI) PN-DAIF (DAI) PN-24DTA-C (DTI) PN-30DTC-A (DTI) PN-IPTB (IPT) PN-24PRTA (PRT)

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

page 226 page 229 page 235 page 238 page 243 page 247-1 page 248 page 252 page 257 page 261 page 264 page 270 page 274 page 278 page 284 page 290 page 294
Continued on next page

*MB = Make Busy

224

Rev.1.1 90224-11

CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS


APPLICATION PROCESSOR CARD

List of Application Processor Card


EXTRACTING/ INSERTION WITH POWER ON X: ALLOWED : ALLOWED AFTER MB* : NOT ALLOWED
X

NAME (FUNCTIONAL NAME)

LAMP X: PROVIDED : NOT PROVIDED

SWITCH X: PROVIDED : NOT PROVIDED

REFERENCE PAGE

PN-4RSTB (MFR) PN-4RSTC (CIR) PN-SC00 (CCH) PN-SC01 (DCH) PN-SC03 (ICH) PN-SC03-A (CSH) PZ-M537 (EXPMEM) PZ-M542 (CONN) PZ-M557 (CONN)

X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X X

page 300 page 302 page 304 page 307 page 310 page 312

X X

page 314 page 317 page 319

*MB = Make Busy

225
90224-11

PN-AP00-A (DBM)

PN-AP00-A (DBM)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

J16

SENSE RUN MB

SW1 WE L3 L2 L1 L0 RS3 RS2 RS1 RS0 SW0

226
90226-10

PN-AP00-A (DBM)

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
RUN WE L0-L3

COLOR
Green Red Green

FUNCTION
Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally. Not used Second data setting value for CMD001 > 250 0 1 (port0)-3 (port2) Indication of CTS signal status on port0-2 Indication of DCD signal status on port0-2 Indication of TXD signal status on port0-2 Indication of RXD signal status on port0-2

L3 L2 L1 L0

Indication of transmitting status of port0 Indication of transmitting status of port1 Indication of transmitting status of port2 Indication of transmitting status of port3

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENSE (Rotary SW)
F 4

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


4-F

FUNCTION

CHECK

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-15) to be set by CM05.

AP No. 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 SW No. 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0-3 Not used UP DOWN For make-busy For normal operation
Continued on next page

NOTE1 MB (Toggle SW)


ON

NOTE2

227
90226-10

PN-AP00-A (DBM)

SWITCH NAME
SW1 (Piano Key SW)
OFF 4 3 2 1 ON

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


ON 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF 4 OFF Not used Not used Not used Not used

FUNCTION
For normal operation

CHECK

For normal operation

For normal operation

SW0 (Dip SW)


ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1-8

OFF

Not used

J16
(Jumper pin) Front

RIGHT LEFT

For normal operation (Memory backup ON) Not used (Memory backup OFF)

The gure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the gure and , the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned. NOTE1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position. NOTE2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card.

228
90226-10

PN-AP00-B (AP00)

PN-AP00-B (AP00)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

CONN SENSE RUN JP0 MB

SW1 L3 L2 L1 L0 RS3 RS2 JP1 RS1 RS0

SW0

SW2

CONN: To CONNR connector on PZ-M537 (EXPMEM)

229
90229-10

PN-AP00-B (AP00)

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
RUN L0-L3

COLOR
Green Green

FUNCTION
Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally. Second data setting value for CMD001 > 250 0 1 (port0)-3 (port2) Indication of CTS signal status on port0-2 Indication of DCD signal status on port0-2 Indication of TXD signal status on port0-2 Indication of RXD signal status on port0-2

L3 L2 L1 L0

Indication of transmitting status of port0 Indication of transmitting status of port1 Indication of transmitting status of port2 Indication of transmitting status of port3

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENSE (Rotary SW)
F 4

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


0-3 4-F Not used

FUNCTION

CHECK

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be set by CM05.


SW1-4: ON SW1-4: OFF 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

AP No.

NOTE1

SW No.

MB (Toggle SW)
ON

UP DOWN

For make-busy For normal operation


Continued on next page

NOTE2

230
90229-10

PN-AP00-B (AP00)

SWITCH NAME
SW0 (Dip SW)
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


ON 1-3 OFF ON 4, 5 OFF ON Not used Not used

FUNCTION

CHECK

For normal operation For normal operation

6 NOTE3

Sets No. 0 Port forcibly in a state which DSR signal is always provided. Receives DSR signal from the DCE on No. 0 Port. Sets No. 1 Port forcibly in a state which DSR signal is always provided. Receives DSR signal from the DCE on No. 1 Port. Sets No. 2 Port forcibly in a state which DSR signal is always provided. Receives DSR signal from the DCE on No. 2 Port. For normal operation Not used For normal operation For AP data clearing by CMD100/ CMD101 For normal operation For AP data clearing by CMD100/ CMD101 AP No. 4-15 AP No. 20-31
Continued on next page

OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 1 OFF


OFF 4 3 2 1 ON

7 NOTE3

8 NOTE3 SW1 (Piano Key SW)

ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF

231
90229-10

PN-AP00-B (AP00)

SWITCH NAME
SW2 (Dip SW)
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


ON

FUNCTION
Sets No. 3 Port forcibly in a state which DSR signal is always provided. Receives DSR signal from the DCE on No. 3 Port. Enables the receive clock from the DCE (Modem) when No. 1 Port is synchronous. (Clock is received at the RXC terminal) Uses internal clock as the receive clock when No. 1 Port is synchronous. When No. 1 Port is asynchronous. Enables transmit clock from the DCE (Modem) when No. 1 Port is synchronous. (Clock is received at the TXC (2) terminal.) Uses internal clock as the send clock when No. 1 Port is synchronous. When No. 1 Port is asynchronous. Transmit the send clock from the DTE (this card) when No. 1 Port is synchronous. (Clock is transmitted from the TXC (1) terminal) Not transmit the send clock from the DTE (this card) when No. 1 Port is synchronous. When No. 1 Port is asynchronous. When No. 1 Port is asynchronous. When No. 1 Port is synchronous.

CHECK

1 NOTE3

OFF

ON 2 OFF

ON 3 OFF

ON 4 OFF

ON OFF

Continued on next page

232
90229-10

PN-AP00-B (AP00)

SWITCH NAME
SW2 (Dip SW)
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION

FUNCTION
Uses internal clock as the receive clock when No. 1 Port is synchronous. When No. 1 Port is asynchronous. Enables receive clock from the DCE (Modem) when No. 1 Port is synchronous. (Clock is received at the RXC terminal) Not used Not used For normal operation (Memory backup ON) Not used (Memory backup OFF) Not used For normal operation

CHECK

ON 6 NOTE4 OFF

7 8 JP0 (Jumper SW)

OFF OFF UP DOWN

JP1 (Jumper SW)

UP DOWN

Continued on next page

The gure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the gure and , the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned. NOTE1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position. NOTE2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card. NOTE3: When the DCE connected to the port does not provide a function to send the DSR signals, set the switch to ON. In this case, the AP00 card can not recognize the actual state of the DCE, so that the call records or system messages will not be stored in the memory buffer on the AP00 card even if the cable is disconnected from the DCE. When the switch is set to OFF, the call records or system messages will be stored when the cable is disconnected, and will be sent when the cable is re-connected.

233
90229-10

PN-AP00-B (AP00)

NOTE4: The use of the external clock (from the distant end) or the internal clock is determined by the following table:

CLOCK
External Internal

SW2 2
ON OFF

6
OFF ON

234
90229-10

PN-AP01 (AP01)

PN-AP01 (AP01)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

J19

SENSE RUN MB

SW1 L3 L2 L1 L0 RS0 IP

SW0

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
RUN L0-L3 L3 L2 L1 L0

COLOR
Green Green

FUNCTION
Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally. Indication of CTS signal status on RS-232C port. Indication of DCD signal status on RS-232C port. Indication of TXD signal status on RS-232C port. Indication of RXD signal status on RS-232C port.

235
90235-10

PN-AP01 (AP01)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENSE (Rotary SW)
F 4

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


4-F

FUNCTION

CHECK

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-15) to be set by CM05.

AP No. 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 SW No. 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0-3 Not used UP DOWN ON 1 OFF Not used For normal operation Not used For normal operation Not used For normal operation Not used
Continued on next page

NOTE1 MB (Toggle SW)


ON

For make-busy For normal operation For normal operation

NOTE2 SW1 (Piano Key SW)


OFF 4 3 2 1 ON

ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF

236
90235-10

PN-AP01 (AP01)

SWITCH NAME
SW0 (Dip SW)

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


ON 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF 4 OFF RIGHT LEFT

FUNCTION
Receives RT clock Uses internal clock Receives ST2 clock Uses internal clock Sends ST1 clock Not send ST1 clock Not used For normal operation (Memory backup ON) Not used (Memory backup OFF)

CHECK

ON

1 2 3 4

J19
(Jumper pin) Front

The gure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the gure and , the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned. NOTE1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position. NOTE2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card.

237
90235-10

PN-BRTA (BRT)

PN-BRTA (BRT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

SENS RUN MB

B1 B2 D ALM

SW0

SW1

238
90238-10

PN-BRTA (BRT)

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
RUN B1

COLOR
Green Green

FUNCTION
Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally. B1 channel status ON: Busy OFF: Idle Flash (60 IPM): Make Busy B2 channel status ON: Busy OFF: Idle Flash (60 IPM): Make Busy D channel status ON: OFF: Busy Idle

B2

Green

Green

ALM

Red

Transmission line fault status ON: Line fault OFF: Normal operation

239
90238-10

PN-BRTA (BRT)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENS (Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


4-F

FUNCTION

CHECK

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-15) to be set by CM05.

AP No. 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 SW No. 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
NOTE1 0-3 MB (Toggle SW)
ON

Not used UP DOWN ON For make-busy For normal operation For normal operation Not used Source clock signal from network is sent to the PLO of MP according to the switch setting of SW0-3. Source clock signal from network is not sent to the PLO of MP card. Clock signal is sent to the PLO 0 of MP. Clock signal is sent to the PLO 1 of MP. For normal operation Not used
Continued on next page

NOTE2 SW0 (Dip SW)


ON 1 2 3 4

OFF ON

2 NOTE3 NOTE4

OFF ON OFF ON

3 NOTE3 NOTE4

4 OFF

240
90238-10

PN-BRTA (BRT)

SWITCH NAME
SW1 (Dip SW)
ON

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


ON

FUNCTION
For terminating the transmitting side of channels B1 and B2 with 100 ohms. To remove the terminating resistor on the transmitting side of channels B1 and B2. For terminating the receiving side of channels B1 and B2 with 100 ohms. To remove the terminating resistor on the receiving side of channels B1 and B2.

CHECK

1 2

1 OFF

ON 2 OFF

Continued on next page

The gure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the gure and , the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned. NOTE1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position. NOTE2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card.

241
90238-10

PN-BRTA (BRT)

NOTE3: Set the SW0-2 and SW0-3 as follows: BRT0 BRT1 BRT2 ---BRT11 REMARKS MP card will receive the clock signal from BRT0 at its PLO0 input. MP card will receive the clock signal from BRT0 at its PLO0 input, under normal conditions. ---- OFF ON Should a clock failure occur with BRT0, MP card will switch to the PLO1 input which gets clock from BRT1.

CONDITIONS SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW ---0-2 0-3 0-2 0-3 0-2 0-3 0-2 0-3 When one BRT is provided. ON ON

When more than one BRT is provided.

ON ON ON OFF OFF ON

NOTE4: When the system is a clock source office, set the SW0-2 and SW0-3 on all the BRT cards mounted in PIM0 to OFF. NOTE5: Mount the BRT card which receives a source clock signals into PIM0.

242
90238-10

PN-2BRTC (BRT)

PN-2BRTC (BRT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and connectors

SENS RUN MB B21 B11 D1 ALM1 B20 B10 D0 ALM0 SW11 SW10 SW0

243
90243-11

PN-2BRTC (BRT)

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
RUN B21

COLOR
Green Red

FUNCTION
Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally. No.1 Circuit B2 channel status ON: Busy OFF: Idle Flash (60 IPM): Make Busy B1 channel status ON: Busy OFF: Idle Flash (60 IPM): Make Busy D channel status ON: OFF: Busy Idle

B11

Red

D1

Green

ALM1

Red

Transmission line fault status ON: Line fault OFF: Normal operation No.0 Circuit B2 channel status ON: Busy OFF: Idle Flash (60 IPM): Make Busy B1 channel status ON: Busy OFF: Idle Flash (60 IPM): Make Busy D channel status ON: OFF: Busy Idle

B20

Red

B10

Red

D0

Green

ALM0

Red

Transmission line fault status ON: Line fault OFF: Normal operation

244
90243-11

PN-2BRTC (BRT)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENS (Rotary SW)
F 4

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


4-F

FUNCTION

CHECK

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be set by CM05.


SW11-4: ON 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

AP No.

SW11-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

NOTE1 0-3 MB (Toggle SW)


ON

SW No.

Not used UP DOWN For make-busy For normal operation For terminating the transmitting side of channels B1 and B2 with 100 ohms. To remove the terminating resistor on the transmitting side of channels B1 and B2. For terminating the receiving side of channels B1 and B2 with 100 ohms. To remove the terminating resistor on the receiving side of channels B1 and B2.
Continued on next page

NOTE2 SW0, SW10 (Dip SW)


ON 1 2

ON 1 OFF

ON 2 OFF

245
90243-11

PN-2BRTC (BRT)

SWITCH NAME
SW11 (Dip SW)

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


ON 1 OFF 2 NOTE3 NOTE4 3 NOTE3 NOTE4 4 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

FUNCTION
For normal operation Not used Output clock signals according to the switch setting of SW11-3. Do not output clock signals. Output clock signals to PLO 0 of MP. Output clock signals to PLO 1 of MP. AP No. 04-15 AP No. 20-31

CHECK

ON

1 2 3 4

Continued on next page

The gure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the gure and , the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned. NOTE1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position. NOTE2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card.

246
90243-11

PN-2BRTC (BRT)

NOTE3: The system can receive clock signals from two clock supply routes. In normal condition, the system synchronizes to the clock signals supplied on the PLO 0 of MP card via the Back Wiring Board, and if the clock signals are failed, the clock supply route takes over to PLO1 automatically. Set SW11-2 and SW11-3 as follows. BRT0 BRT1 BRT2 ---BRT11 REMARKS
MP card will receive the clock signal from No.0 circuit of BRT0 at its PLO0 input. Should a clock failure occure with No.0 circuit, MP card will switch to No. 1 circuit of BRT0. MP card will receive the clock signal from BRT0 at its PLO0 input, under normal conditions. Should a clock failure occure with both No.0 and No.1 circuits of BRT0, MP card will switch to the PLO1 input which gets clock from BRT1.

CONDITIONS SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW ---11-2 11-3 11-2 11-3 11-2 11-3 11-2 11-3

When one BRT is provided.

ON

ON

When more than one BRT is provided.

ON

ON

ON OFF OFF ON

---- OFF ON

NOTE4: When the system is a clock source office, set the SW11-2 and SW11-3 on all the BRT cards mounted in PIM0 to OFF. NOTE5: Mount the BRT card which receives a source clock signals into PIM0.

247

Rev.1.1 90243-11

PN-2BRTK (BRT)

PN-2BRTK (BRT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and connectors

SENSE RUN MB B21 B11 D1 ALM1 B20 B10 D0 ALM0 SW10 SW11

SW0

247-1

Rev.1.1 90247A11

PN-2BRTK (BRT)

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
RUN B21

COLOR
Green Red

FUNCTION
Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally. No.1 Circuit B2 channel status ON: Busy OFF: Idle Flash (60 IPM): Make Busy B1 channel status ON: Busy OFF: Idle Flash (60 IPM): Make Busy D channel status ON: OFF: Busy Idle

B11

Red

D1

Green

ALM1

Red

Transmission line fault status ON: Line fault OFF: Normal operation No.0 Circuit B2 channel status ON: Busy OFF: Idle Flash (60 IPM): Make Busy B1 channel status ON: Busy OFF: Idle Flash (60 IPM): Make Busy D channel status ON: OFF: Busy Idle

B20

Red

B10

Red

D0

Green

ALM0

Red

Transmission line fault status ON: Line fault OFF: Normal operation

247-2

Rev.1.1 90247A11

PN-2BRTK (BRT)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENSE (Rotary SW)
F 4

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


4-F

FUNCTION

CHECK

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be set by CM05.


SW11-4: ON 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

AP No.

SW11-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

NOTE1 0-3 MB (Toggle SW)


ON

SW No.

Not used UP DOWN For make-busy For normal operation For terminating the transmitting side of channels B1 and B2 with 100 ohms. To remove the terminating resistor on the transmitting side of channels B1 and B2. For terminating the receiving side of channels B1 and B2 with 100 ohms. To remove the terminating resistor on the receiving side of channels B1 and B2.
Continued on next page

NOTE2 SW0, SW10 (Dip SW)


ON 1 2

ON 1 OFF

ON 2 OFF

247-3

Rev.1.1 90247A11

PN-2BRTK (BRT)

SWITCH NAME
SW11 (Dip SW)

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


ON 1 OFF 2 NOTE3 NOTE4 3 NOTE3 NOTE4 4 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

FUNCTION
For normal operation Not used Output clock signals according to the switch setting of SW11-3. Do not output clock signals. Output clock signals to PLO 0 of MP. Output clock signals to PLO 1 of MP. AP No. 04-15 AP No. 20-31

CHECK

ON

1 2 3 4

Continued on next page

The gure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the gure and , the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned. NOTE1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position. NOTE2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card.

247-4

Rev.1.1 90247A11

PN-2BRTK (BRT)

NOTE3: The system can receive clock signals from two clock supply routes. In normal condition, the system synchronizes to the clock signals supplied on the PLO 0 of MP card via the Back Wiring Board, and if the clock signals are failed, the clock supply route takes over to PLO1 automatically. Set SW11-2 and SW11-3 as follows. BRT0 BRT1 BRT2 ---BRT11 REMARKS
MP card will receive the clock signal from No.0 circuit of BRT0 at its PLO0 input. Should a clock failure occure with No.0 circuit, MP card will switch to No. 1 circuit of BRT0. MP card will receive the clock signal from BRT0 at its PLO0 input, under normal conditions. Should a clock failure occure with both No.0 and No.1 circuits of BRT0, MP card will switch to the PLO1 input which gets clock from BRT1.

CONDITIONS SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW ---11-2 11-3 11-2 11-3 11-2 11-3 11-2 11-3

When one BRT is provided.

ON

ON

When more than one BRT is provided.

ON

ON

ON OFF OFF ON

---- OFF ON

NOTE4: When the system is a clock source office, set the SW11-2 and SW11-3 on all the BRT cards mounted in PIM0 to OFF. NOTE5: Mount the BRT card which receives a source clock signals into PIM0.

247-5

Rev.1.1 90247A11

THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY.

247-6

Rev.1.1 90247A11

PN-CC01 (ETHER)

PN-CC01 (ETHER)
Location of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

SW1

SW2

RUN MB LINK XMT RCV RVP ERR 10BASE-T

IP

248
90248-10

PN-CC01 (ETHER)

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
RUN LINK XMT RCV RVP ERR

COLOR
Green Green Green Green Green

FUNCTION
Flashes at 60 IPM while this card is operating normally. Remains lit when link is established. Remains lit when it is transmitting the data. Remains lit when it is receiving the data. Remains lit only when it is receiving the data with its own IP address. Not used

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
MB (Toggle SW)
ON

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


UP

FUNCTION
For make-busy For normal operation

CHECK

NOTE1

DOWN

Continued on next page

249
90248-10

PN-CC01 (ETHER)

SWITCH NAME
SW1 (Dip SW)
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


1 (D15) 2 (D14) 3 (D13) ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

FUNCTION

CHECK

ON:0 OFF:1

MAC ADDRESS
00004CA4 X X X X (HEX) Fixed

SWITCH SETTING

NOTE2

4 (D12) 5 (D11)

SW1-1 (D15) SW1-2 (D14) SW1-3 (D13) SW1-4 (D12)

ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

6 (D10)

SW1-5 (D11) SW1-6 (D10) SW1-7 (D9) SW1-8 (D8)

ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

7 (D9)

8 (D8) SW2 (Dip SW)


ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SW2-1 (D7) SW2-2 (D6) SW2-3 (D5) SW2-4 (D4)

ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

1 (D7)

SW2-5 (D3) SW2-6 (D2) SW2-7 (D1) SW2-8 (D0)

ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

2 (D6) NOTE2 3 (D5)

4 (D4)

5 (D3)

6 (D2)

7 (D1)

8 (D0)

Continued on next page

250
90248-10

PN-CC01 (ETHER)

NOTE1: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the Circuit card. NOTE2: Each equipment must have a unique MAC address to distinguish between systems. Therefore, when more than one PBX is installed in the same network, assign the lower 4 digits of the following MAC address by SW1 and SW2 to prevent duplicate addresses.
00004CA4 XX XX (HEX) According to the switch setting of SW2 (D7-D0) According to the switch setting of SW1 (D15-D8)

Fixed

251
90248-10

PN-DAIA (DAI)

PN-DAIA (DAI)
Location of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

SENSE RUN MB LINK RED RMT LOOP PWR BL BUS

SW1 SW2 SW3

PCM1 JPS PCM0

JPR CN

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
RUN LINK

COLOR
Green Green

FUNCTION
Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally. Remains lit when a link between this card and a distant ofce is normally connected. Goes out after 15 seconds of link disconnection. Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss or Frame Alignment signal loss. Remains lit when receiving the alarm signal from a distant ofce. Not used Not used Remains lit while data transmission on control channel (D ch). Flashes while FP data downloading.

RED RMT LOOP PWR BL

Red Red Red

252
90252-11

PN-DAIA (DAI)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENSE (Rotary SW)
1 2

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION

FUNCTION

CHECK

FP (Firmware Processor) Number setting for the DAIA card. By this setting, the system regards the DAIA card and the opposite DAIB card as one Firmware Processor. 0-F 0 1 2 3 4F Not used FP No. 1 FP No. 2 FP No. 3 Not used For make-busy For normal operation For supplying 1.5MHz clock to PLO 0 No clock supply to PLO 0 For supplying 1.5MHz clock to PLO 1 No clock supply to PLO 1 Always set to OFF Always set to OFF
Continued on next page

NOTE1

MB (Toggle SW)
ON

UP DOWN 1 NOTE3 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF

NOTE2 SW1 (Piano Key SW)


OFF 4 3 2 1 ON

2 NOTE3 3 4

253
90252-11

PN-DAIA (DAI)

SWITCH NAME
SW2 (Dip SW)

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


ON 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF ON 8 OFF
4 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF

FUNCTION
Control channel signaling data transmission speed: 48kbps Control channel signaling data transmission speed: 64kbps DTI frame conguration: 12-Multi Frame DTI frame conguration: 24-Multi Frame Line code: AMI with ZCS Line code: B8ZS Setting of control signal time slot
SWITCH NUMBER 5 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF 6 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF 7 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON 8 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF TIME SLOT NUMBER TS1 TS2 TS3 TS4 TS5 TS6 TS7 TS8 TS9 TS10 TS11 TS12 TS13 TS14 TS15 TS16 TS17 TS18 TS19 TS23

CHECK

ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

NOTE4: The time slot number 0, 20, 21, and 22 (TS0/20/21/ 22) can not be used for control signal. NOTE5: This setting must be identical with the opposite DAIB card.
Continued on next page

254
90252-11

PN-DAIA (DAI)

SWITCH NAME
SW3 (Dip SW)
ON 1 2 3 4

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


ON 1 OFF ON 2 OFF
ON ON OFF

FUNCTION
Set the equalizer according to the cable length between the system and the CSU.
SW -1
ON

CHECK

SW -2
ON

SW -3
ON OFF ON

CABLE LENGTH
0 - 40m (0-131.2ft.) 40 - 80m (131.2-262.5ft.) 80 - 120m (262.5-394ft.) 120 - 160m (394-525ft.) 160 - 200m (525-656ft.)

ON
ON ON

3 OFF

OFF OFF ON ON

OFF

OFF OFF OFF Signal is not sent

4 JPS (Jumper pin)

OFF Right Left

Always set to OFF For mounting this card on PIM1 PIM7 For mounting this card on PIM0 Neutral grounding on the receiving line is provided. Neutral grounding on the receiving line is not provided.
Continued on next page

JPR (Jumper pin)

Right Left

The gure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the gure and , the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned. NOTE1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position. NOTE2: When the power is on, flip th MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card.

255
90252-11

PN-DAIA (DAI)

NOTE3: When source clock signal is supplied via the line between the main site and the remote site, set the SW1-1 and SW1-2 as the following table. In this case, DAIA cards (DAIA0, DAIA1) must be mounted in PIM0.

DAIA0 CONDITIONS
One DAIA card is provided.

DAIA1 SW 1-1

DAIA2 SW 1-1

SW 1-1
ON

SW 1-2
OFF

SW 1-2

SW 1-2

REMARKS
The clock signal is sent to PLO0 of MP card via supply route 0 (DAIA0). The clock signal supply route is automatically changed to the route 1 (DAIA1), if a transmission line failure occurs on the supply route 0.

Two or three DAIA cards are provided.

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

256

Rev.1.1 90252-11

PN-DAIB (DAI)

PN-DAIB (DAI)
Location of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

SENSE RUN MB LINK RED RMT LOOP BL

SW1 SW2 SW3

BUS

JPS JPR CN

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
RUN LINK

COLOR
Green Green

FUNCTION
Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally. Remains lit when a link between this card and a distant ofce is normally connected. Goes out after 15 seconds of link disconnection. Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss or Frame Alignment signal loss. Remains lit when receiving the alarm signal from a distant ofce. Not used Remains lit while data transmission on control channel (D ch). Flashes while FP data downloading.

RED RMT LOOP BL

Red Red Red

257
90257-10

PN-DAIB (DAI)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENSE (Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


0 0-F 1-F Not used

FUNCTION
Always set to 0

CHECK

MB (Toggle SW)
ON

UP DOWN 1 2 3 4 OFF OFF OFF OFF

For make-busy For normal operation Always set to OFF Always set to OFF Always set to OFF Always set to OFF
Continued on next page

NOTE1 SW1 (Piano Key SW)


OFF 4 3 2 1 ON

258
90257-10

PN-DAIB (DAI)

SWITCH NAME
SW2 (Dip SW)

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


ON 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF ON 8 OFF
4 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF

FUNCTION
Control channel signaling data transmission speed: 48kbps Control channel signaling data transmission speed: 64kbps DTI frame conguration: 12-Multi Frame DTI frame conguration: 24-Multi Frame Line code: AMI with ZCS Line code: B8ZS Setting of control signal time slot
SWITCH NUMBER 5 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF 6 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF 7 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON 8 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF TIME SLOT NUMBER TS1 TS2 TS3 TS4 TS5 TS6 TS7 TS8 TS9 TS10 TS11 TS12 TS13 TS14 TS15 TS16 TS17 TS18 TS19 TS23

CHECK

ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

NOTE2: The time slot number 0, 20, 21, and 22 (TS0/20/21/ 22) can not be used for control signal. NOTE3: This setting must be identical with the opposite DAIA card.
Continued on next page

259
90257-10

PN-DAIB (DAI)

SWITCH NAME
SW3 (Dip SW)
ON 1 2 3 4

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


ON 1 OFF ON 2 OFF
ON ON OFF

FUNCTION
Set the equalizer according to the cable length between the system and the CSU.
SW -1
ON

CHECK

SW -2
ON

SW -3
ON OFF ON

CABLE LENGTH
0 - 40m (0-131.2ft.) 40 - 80m (131.2-262.5ft.) 80 - 120m (262.5-394ft.) 120 - 160m (394-525ft.) 160 - 200m (525-656ft.)

ON
ON ON

3 OFF

OFF OFF ON ON

OFF

OFF OFF OFF Signal is not sent

4 JPS (Jumper pin)

OFF UP DOWN

Always set to OFF Neutral grounding on the transmitting line is provided. Neutral grounding on the transmitting line is not provided. Neutral grounding on the receiving line is provided. Neutral grounding on the receiving line is not provided.

JPR (Jumper pin)

UP DOWN

The gure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the gure and , the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned. NOTE1: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card.

260
90257-10

PN-DAIC (DAI)

PN-DAIC (DAI)
Location of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

RUN MB LINK RED RMT LOOP PWR BL TBUS

SW2 SW1

SW3 RBUS

CN

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
RUN LINK

COLOR
Green Green

FUNCTION
Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally. Remains lit when the following connection are normal. Control channel link between the DAIA card and DAIB card. Connection between the opposite DAIC card. Goes out after 15 seconds of link disconnection. Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss or Frame Alignment signal loss. Remains lit when receiving the alarm signal from a distant ofce. Not used Not used Not used

RED RMT LOOP PWR BL

Red Red

261
90261-10

PN-DAIC (DAI)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
MB (Toggle SW)
ON

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


UP DOWN 1 2 3 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 2 OFF 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

FUNCTION
For make-busy For normal operation Always set to OFF Always set to OFF Always set to OFF Always set to OFF Not used DTI frame conguration: 12-Multi Frame DTI frame conguration: 24-Multi Frame Line code: AMI with ZCS Line code: B8ZS Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used

CHECK

NOTE SW1 (Piano Key SW)


OFF 4 3 2 1 ON

4 1

SW2 (Dip SW)


ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Continued on next page

262
90261-10

PN-DAIC (DAI)

SWITCH NAME
SW3 (Dip SW)
ON

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


ON 1 OFF ON 2 OFF
ON ON OFF

FUNCTION
Set the equalizer according to the cable length between the system and the CSU.
SW -1
ON

CHECK

1 2 3 4

SW -2
ON

SW -3
ON OFF ON

CABLE LENGTH
0 - 40m (0-131.2ft.) 40 - 80m (131.2-262.5ft.) 80 - 120m (262.5-394ft.) 120 - 160m (394-525ft.) 160 - 200m (525-656ft.)

ON

ON ON

3 OFF

OFF OFF ON ON

OFF

OFF OFF OFF Signal is not sent

ON 4 OFF

When mounting this card on remote site. When mounting this card on main site.

The gure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the gure and , the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned. NOTE: When the power is on, flip MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card.

263
90261-10

PN-DAID (DAI)

PN-DAID (DAI)
Location of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

SENSE RUN MB LINK RMT LOOP PWR BL BUS

SW1

SW2 SW3

PCM1 PCM0 E1Z JP SRT

JPR

JPS CN

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
RUN LINK

COLOR
Green Green

FUNCTION
Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally. Remains lit when a link between this card and a distant ofce is normally connected. Goes out after 15 seconds of link disconnection. Remains lit when receiving the alarm signal from a distant ofce. Not used Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss. Remains lit while data transmission on control channel (D ch). Remains lit while FP data downloading.

RMT LOOP PWR BL

Red Red Red

264
90264-11

PN-DAID (DAI)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENSE (Rotary SW)
1 2

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION

FUNCTION

CHECK

FP (Firmware Processor) Number setting for the DAID card. By this setting, the system regards the DAID card and the opposite DAIE card as one Firmware Processor. 0-F 0 1 2 3 4-F Not used FP No. 1 FP No. 2 FP No. 3 Not used For make-busy For normal operation For supplying 2.0 MHz clock to PLO 0 No clock supply to PLO 0 For supplying 2.0 MHz clock to PLO 1 No clock supply to PLO 1 Always set to OFF Always set to OFF
Continued on next page

NOTE1

MB (Toggle SW)
ON

UP DOWN ON OFF

NOTE2 SW1 (Piano Key SW)


OFF 4 3 2 1 ON

1 NOTE3

2 NOTE3 3 4

ON OFF OFF OFF

265
90264-11

PN-DAID (DAI)

SWITCH NAME
SW2 (Dip SW)
ON

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


ON 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF

FUNCTION
Control channel signaling data transmission speed: 48kbps Control channel signaling data transmission speed: 64kbps CRC Synchronization Detection Timer is provided. CRC Synchronization Detection Timer is not provided. CRC4 Check is provided. CRC4 Check is not provided.

CHECK

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Continued on next page

266
90264-11

PN-DAID (DAI)

SWITCH NAME
SW2 (Dip SW)

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


ON 4 OFF ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF ON

FUNCTION
Setting of control signal time slot
SWITCH NUMBER 4 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF 5 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 6 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF 7 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 8 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF TIME SLOT NUMBER TS 1 TS 2 TS 3 TS 4 TS 5 TS 6 TS 7 TS 8 TS 9 TS 10 TS 11 TS 12 TS 13 TS 14 TS 15 TS 16 TS 17 TS 18 TS 19 TS 20 TS 21 TS 22 TS 23 TS 24 TS 25 TS 26 TS 27 TS 29 TS 30 TS 31

CHECK

ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

OFF 8

NOTE4: The time slot number 0 and 28 (TS0/28) can not be used for control signal. NOTE5: This setting must be identical with the opposite DAIE card.
Continued on next page

267
90264-11

PN-DAID (DAI)

SWITCH NAME
SW3 (Dip SW)
ON 1 2 3 4

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


1 2 3 4 ON ON ON OFF Right Left

FUNCTION
Always set to ON Always set to ON Always set to ON Always set to OFF Balanced transmission: 120 ohms (For twisted-pair cable) TA is grounded on the transmission line: 75 ohms (For coaxial cable) Balanced transmission: 120 ohms (For twisted-pair cable) RA is grounded on the transmission line: 75 ohms (For coaxial cable) Line impedance: 120 ohms (For twisted-pair cable) Line impedance: 75 ohms (For coaxial cable) For mounting this card on PIM0 For mounting this card on PIM1PIM7 Line impedance: 120 ohms (For twisted-pair cable) Line impedance: 75 ohms (For coaxial cable)

CHECK

JPS (Jumper pin)

JPR (Jumper pin)

Right Left

E1Z (Jumper pin)

Right Left

SRT (Jumper pin)

Right Left

JP (Jumper pin)

UP DOWN

Continued on next page

The gure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the gure and , the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned. NOTE1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position. NOTE2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card.

268

Rev.1.1 90264-11

PN-DAID (DAI)

NOTE3: When source clock signal is supplied via the line between the main site and the remote site, set the SW1-1 and SW1-2 as the following table. In this case, DAID cards (DAID0, DAID1) must be mounted in PIM0.

DAID0 CONDITIONS SW 1-1


ON

DAID1 SW 1-1

DAID2 SW 1-1

SW 1-2
OFF

SW 1-2

SW 1-2

REMARKS
The clock signal is sent to PLO0 of MP card via supply route 0 (DAID0). The clock signal supply route is automatically changed to the route 1 (DAID1), if a transmission line failure occurs on the supply route 0.

One DAID card is provided.

Two or three DAID cards are provided.

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

269

Rev.1.1 90264-11

PN-DAIE (DAI)

PN-DAIE (DAI)
Location of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

SENSE RUN MB LINK RMT LOOP BL SW1 BUS

SW2 SW3

JP

E1Z

JPR

JPS

CN

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
RUN LINK

COLOR
Green Green

FUNCTION
Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally. Remains lit when a link between this card and a distant ofce is normally connected. Goes out after 15 seconds of link disconnection. Remains lit when receiving the alarm signal from a distant ofce. Not used Remains lit while data transmission on control channel (D ch). Remains lit while FP data downloading.

RMT LOOP BL

Red Red

270
90270-10

PN-DAIE (DAI)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENSE (Rotary SW)

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


0 0-F 1-F Not used

FUNCTION
Always set to 0

CHECK

MB (Toggle SW)
ON

UP DOWN 1 2 3 4 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF

For make-busy For normal operation Always set to OFF Always set to OFF Always set to OFF Always set to OFF Control channel signaling data transmission speed: 48kbps Control channel signaling data transmission speed: 64kbps CRC Synchronization Detection Timer is provided. CRC Synchronization Detection Timer is not provided. CRC4 Check is provided. CRC4 Check is not provided.
Continued on next page

NOTE1 SW1 (Piano Key SW)


OFF 4 3 2 1 ON

SW2 (Dip SW)


ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

271
90270-10

PN-DAIE (DAI)

SWITCH NAME
SW2 (Dip SW)

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


ON 4 OFF ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF ON

FUNCTION
Setting of control signal time slot
SWITCH NUMBER 4 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF 5 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 6 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF 7 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 8 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF TIME SLOT NUMBER TS 1 TS 2 TS 3 TS 4 TS 5 TS 6 TS 7 TS 8 TS 9 TS 10 TS 11 TS 12 TS 13 TS 14 TS 15 TS 16 TS 17 TS 18 TS 19 TS 20 TS 21 TS 22 TS 23 TS 24 TS 25 TS 26 TS 27 TS 29 TS 30 TS 31

CHECK

ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

OFF 8

NOTE2: The time slot number 0 and 28 (TS0/28) can not be used for control signal. NOTE3: This setting must be identical with the opposite DAID card.
Continued on next page

272
90270-10

PN-DAIE (DAI)

SWITCH NAME
SW3 (Dip SW)
ON 1 2 3 4

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


1 2 3 4 ON ON ON OFF Right Left

FUNCTION
Always set to ON Always set to ON Always set to ON Always set to OFF Balanced transmission: 120 ohms (For twisted-pair cable) TA is grounded on the transmission line: 75 ohms (For coaxial cable) RA is grounded on the transmission line: 75 ohms (For coaxial cable) Balanced transmission: 120 ohms (For twisted-pair cable) Line impedance: 75 ohms (For coaxial cable) Line impedance: 120 ohms (For twisted-pair cable) Line impedance: 75 ohms (For coaxial cable) Line impedance: 120 ohms (For twisted-pair cable)

CHECK

JPS (Jumper pin)

JPR (Jumper pin)

Right Left

E1Z (Jumper pin)

Right Left

SRT (Jumper pin)

Right

Left

The gure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the gure and , the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned. NOTE1: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card.

273
90270-10

PN-DAIF (DAI)

PN-DAIF (DAI)
Location of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

RUN MB LINK SW2 SW1 RMT LOOP PWR BL

TBUS SW3 JPS JP RBUS

JPR CN

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
RUN LINK

COLOR
Green Green

FUNCTION
Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally. Remains lit when the following connection are normal. Control channel link between the DAID card and DAIE card. Connection between the opposite DAIF card. Goes out after 15 seconds of link disconnection. Remains lit when receiving the alarm signal from a distant ofce. Not used Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss. (Only on the DAIF card mounted on the Main Site.) Not used

RMT LOOP PWR BL

Red Red

274
90274-10

PN-DAIF (DAI)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
MB (Toggle SW)
ON

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


UP DOWN 1 OFF ON 2 OFF 3 4 OFF OFF

FUNCTION
For make-busy For normal operation Always set to OFF Line impedance: 75 ohms (For coaxial cable) Line impedance: 120 ohms (For twisted-pair cable) Always set to OFF Always set to OFF

CHECK

NOTE SW1 (Piano Key SW)


OFF 4 3 2 1 ON

Continued on next page

275
90274-10

PN-DAIF (DAI)

SWITCH NAME
SW2 (Dip SW)
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


ON 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF 4 5 6 7 8 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

FUNCTION
Control channel signaling data transmission speed: 48kbps Control channel signaling data transmission speed: 64kbps CRC Synchronization Detection Timer is provided. CRC Synchronization Detection Timer is not provided. CRC4 Check is provided. CRC4 Check is not provided. Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used

CHECK

Continued on next page

276
90274-10

PN-DAIF (DAI)

SWITCH NAME
SW3 (Dip SW)
ON 1 2 3 4

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


1 2 3 ON ON ON ON 4 OFF

FUNCTION
Always set to ON Always set to ON Always set to ON When mounting this card on remote site. When mounting this card on main site. TA is grounded on the transmission line: 75 ohms (For coaxial cable) Balanced transmission: 120 ohms (For twisted-pair cable) RA is grounded on the transmission line: 75 ohms (For coaxial cable) Balanced transmission: 120 ohms (For twisted-pair cable) Line impedance: 75 ohms (For coaxial cable) Line impedance: 120 ohms (For twisted-pair cable)

CHECK

JPS (Jumper pin)

Right Left

JPR (Jumper pin)

Right Left

JP (Jumper pin)

UP DOWN

The gure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the gure and , the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned. NOTE: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card.

277
90274-10

PN-24DTA-C (DTI)

PN-24DTA-C (DTI)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

SENSE RUN MAS MB SW1

SW0 AISS CRC PCM FRM RMT AIS BL JPS JRR1

JPR0

278
90278-11

PN-24DTA-C (DTI)

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
RUN CRC PCM FRM RMT AIS BL

COLOR
Green Red Red Red Red Red Red

FUNCTION
Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally. Remains lit when detecting Cyclic Redundancy Checking (CRC) errors. Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss. Remains lit when detecting Frame Alignment signal loss. Remains lit when receiving Frame Alignment signal loss alarm from a distant ofce. Remains lit when a pattern of consecutive 1 is received. The distant ofce transmits this signal for a loop-back test. B channel status ON OFF Flash (60 IPM) Flash (120 IPM) : More than 10 channels are busy : All channels are idle : Only one channel is busy : 2 through 10 channels are busy

279
90278-11

PN-24DTA-C (DTI)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENSE (Rotary SW)
F 4

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


0-3 4-F Not used

FUNCTION

CHECK

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be set by CM05.


SW1-4: ON 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

AP No.

NOTE 1

SW1-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

SW No.

MB (Toggle SW)
ON

UP DOWN

For make-busy For normal operation


Continued on next page

NOTE 2

280
90278-11

PN-24DTA-C (DTI)

SWITCH NAME
SW0 (Piano Key SW)
OFF 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ON

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


1 NOTE 3 NOTE 4 ON

FUNCTION
Source clock signal from network is sent to the PLO 0 input on MP card. Source clock signal from network is not sent to the PLO 0 input on MP card. Source clock signal from network is sent to the PLO 1 input on MP card. Source clock signal from network is not sent to the PLO 1 input on MP card. Remote loop-back For normal operation Local loop-back (AIS send) For normal operation Set equalizer according to the cable length between the PBX and the MDF.
SW0-5 SW0-6 SW0-7

CHECK

OFF

2 NOTE 3 NOTE 4

ON

OFF ON

3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF 8 OFF

CABLE LENGTH

ON ON ON ON OFF OFF

ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

0-40m (0-131.2ft.) 40-80m (131.2-262.5ft.) 80-120m (262.5-394ft.) 120-160m (394-525ft.) 160-200m (525-656ft.) Signal is not sent

Not used
Continued on next page

281
90278-11

PN-24DTA-C (DTI)

SWITCH NAME
SW1 (Piano Key SW)
OFF 4 3 2 1 ON

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


1 2 3 OFF OFF OFF ON 4 OFF UP DOWN Not used Not used Not used

FUNCTION

CHECK

AP No. 04-15 AP No. 20-31 Neutral grounding on the receiving line is provided. Neutral grounding on the receiving line is not provided. Line impedance: 100 ohms Line impedance: 110 ohms Neutral grounding on the transmitting line is provided. Neutral grounding on the transmitting line is not provided. Clock Source Clock Receiver AIS signal is sent out when makebusy or power on. AIS signal is not sent out when make-busy or power on.
Continued on next page

NOTE 4 JPR0 (Jumper pin)

JPR1 (Jumper pin)

Right Left

JPS (Jumper pin)

UP DOWN

MAS (Jumper pin)

UP DOWN

AISS (Jumper pin)

UP DOWN

The gure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in

in the SETTING POSITION-

column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the gure and , the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
282
90278-11

PN-24DTA-C (DTI)

NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position. NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card. NOTE 3: Set SW0-1 and SW0-2 as follows:
DTI0 CONDITIONS SW 0-1 SW 0-2 DTI1 SW 0-1 SW 0-2 DTI2 SW 0-1 SW 0-2 SW 0-1 SW 0-2 DTI8 SW 0-1 SW 0-2 REMARKS

When one DTI is provided.

ON OFF

MP card will receive the clock signal from DTI0 at its PLO0 input.

When more than one DTI is provided.

MP card will receive the clock signal from DTI0 at its PLO0 input, under normal conditions. ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Should a clock failure occur with DTI0, MP card will automatically switch to the PLO1 input which gets clock from DTI1.

NOTE 4: When the PBX is a clock source office, set the SW0-1 and SW0-2 on all the DTI cards mounted in PIM0 to OFF. NOTE 5: Mount the DTI card which receives a source clock signal into PIM0.

283

Rev.1.1 90278-11

PN-30DTC-A (DTI)

PN-30DTC-A (DTI)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

SENS RUN MB

SW

JPS JPR JP

PCM FRM MFRM RMT MRMT AIS BL

284
90284-10

PN-30DTC-A (DTI)

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
RUN PCM FRM MFRM RMT

COLOR
Green Red Red Red Red

FUNCTION
Flashes at 120 IPM when this card is normally operating. Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss. Remains lit when detecting Frame Alignment signal loss. Remains lit when detecting Multi-Frame Alignment signal loss on time slot 16. Remains lit when receiving the alarm from a distant ofce because Frame Alignment signal loss has been detected at the distant ofce. Remains lit when receiving the alarm from a distant ofce because Multi-Frame Alignment signal loss has been detected at the distant ofce. Remains lit when indicating that the pattern of consecutive 1 is being received. The distant ofce transmits this signal for a loopback test distant. B channel status ON OFF Flash (60 IPM) Flash (120 IPM) : More than10 channels are busy : All channels are idle : Only one channel is busy : 2 to 10 channels are busy

MRMT

Red

AIS

Red

BL

Red

285
90284-10

PN-30DTC-A (DTI)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENS (Rotary SW)
F 4

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


4-F

FUNCTION

CHECK

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be set by CM05.


SW-8: ON 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

AP No.

SW-8: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

SW No.

NOTE1 0-3 MB (Toggle SW)


ON

Not used UP DOWN For make-busy For normal operation


Continued on next page

NOTE2

286
90284-10

PN-30DTC-A (DTI)

SWITCH NAME
SW (Piano Key SW)
OFF 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ON

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


1 NOTE3 NOTE4 ON

FUNCTION
Source clock signal from network is sent to the PLO 0 input on MP card. Source clock signal from network is not sent to the PLO 0 input on MP card Source clock signal from network is sent to the PLO 1 input on MP card. Source clock signal from network is not sent to the PLO 1 input on MP card. Remote loop-back For normal operation Local loop-back (AIS send) For normal operation Transmission line cable: Coaxial cable (75 ohms) Transmission line cable: Twisted-pair cable (120 ohms) Always set to OFF AP No. 04-15 AP No. 20-31

CHECK

OFF

2 NOTE3 NOTE4

ON

OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON

5 OFF 6 7 8 OFF OFF ON OFF

Continued on next page

287
90284-10

PN-30DTC-A (DTI)

SWITCH NAME
JPS (Jumper pin)

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


UP

FUNCTION
Balanced transmission (For twisted-pair cable) TA is grounded on the transmission line (For coaxial cable) Balanced transmission (For twisted-pair cable) RA is grounded on the transmission line (For coaxial cable) Line impedance: 75 ohms (For coaxial cable) Line impedance: 120 ohms (For twisted-pair cable)

CHECK

DOWN JPR (Jumper pin)

UP

DOWN JP (Jumper pin)

RIGHT

LEFT

Continued on next page

The gure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the gure and , the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned. NOTE1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position. NOTE2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card.

288
90284-10

PN-30DTC-A (DTI)

NOTE3: Set the SW-1 and SW-2 as follows: DTI0 CONDITIONS DTI1 DTI2 DTI3 REMARKS
MP card will receive the clock signal from DTI0 at its PLO0 input.

SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW -1 -2 -1 -2 -1 -2 -1 -2
ON OFF

When one DTI is provided.

When more than one DTI is provided.

ON

OFF OFF

ON

MP card will receive the clock signal from DTI0 at its PLO0 input, under normal conditions. OFF OFF OFF OFF Should a clock failure occur with DTI0, MP card will automatically switch to the PLO1 input which gets from DTI1.

NOTE4: When the PBX is a clock source office, set the SW-1 and SW-2 on all the DTI cards mounted in PIM0 to OFF. NOTE5: Mount the DTI card which receives a source clock signal into PIM0.

289
90284-10

PN-IPTB (IPT)

PN-IPTB (IPT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
PZ-M567 PN-IPTB

SENSE SW1 RUN MB BUSY SUBOPE3 SUBOPE2 SUBOPE1 SUBOPE0 L3 L2 L1 IP-LYR VCTA/VCT : TO PN-4VCTI

IP-LINK IP-TXRX IP-COL IP-100M VCTA VCT IP CONN

SW2

IP CONN : TO EXTERNAL LAN INTERFACE

MODE

290

Rev.1.1 90290-11

PN-IPTB (IPT)

Lamp Indications PN-IPTB

LAMP NAME
RUN BUSY SUBOPE3 SUBOPE2 SUBOPE1 SUBOPE0 L3 L2 L1 IP-LYR PN-M567

COLOR
Green Red Green Green Green Green Green Green

FUNCTION
Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally. When even 1-line ON: Even one line is busy When even 1-line OFF: All lines are idle Remains lit when Card No.3 of PN-4VCTI is operating. Remains lit when Card No.2 of PN-4VCTI is operating. Remains lit when Card No.1 of PN-4VCTI is operating. Remains lit when Card No.0 of PN-4VCTI is operating. Not used Not used Remains lit when a loop-back test is in progress. Remains lit when IP network is ready to use.

LAMP NAME
IP-TXRX IP-100M IP-LINK IP-COL

COLOR
Green Green Green Green

FUNCTION
Remains lit when sending or receiving IP data. ON: Ethernet is operating with 100Mbps. OFF: Ethernet is operating with 10Mbps. ON: Being connected to IP network (Link established). OFF: Disconnected to IP network (No link established). Remains lit when detecting IP data collision.

291

Rev.1.1 90290-11

PN-IPTB (IPT)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENSE (Rotary SW)
F 4

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


0-3 4-F Not used

FUNCTION

CHECK

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be set by CM05.


SW1-4: ON 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

AP No.

NOTE1

SW1-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

SW No.

MB (Toggle SW)
ON

UP DOWN 0 0, 1 1 2-F

For make-busy For normal operation Auto Negotiation ON Auto Negotiation OFF Not used
Continued on next page

NOTE2 MODE (Rotary SW)

292

Rev.1.1 90290-11

PN-IPTB (IPT)

SWITCH NAME
SW1 (Dip SW)

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


ON 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF Not used Not used

FUNCTION
For normal operation Not used For normal operation

CHECK

ON

1 2 3 4

For normal operation

AP Number: 04-15 AP Number: 20-31 Ethernet 100 Mbps Ethernet 10 Mbps Not used Echo Canceller nonlinear processor is used. Echo Canceller nonlinear processor is not used. NOTE3 NOTE3

SW2 (Dip SW)


ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2-7

ON OFF OFF ON

8 OFF

The gure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the gure and , the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned. NOTE1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position. NOTE2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card. NOTE3: These switch settings are valid only when MODE switch (Rotary SW) is set to 1 (Auto Negotiation OFF).

293

Rev.1.1 90290-11

PN-24PRTA (PRT)

PN-24PRTA (PRT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

SENSE RUN MAS MB SW1

SW0 AISS LC LPB CRC PCM FRM RMT AIS BL

JPR0 JPS JRR1

SW2

294
90294-11

PN-24PRTA (PRT)

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
RUN LC LPB CRC PCM FRM RMT AIS BL

COLOR
Green Green Red Red Red Red Red Red

FUNCTION
Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally. Remains lit when communications are normally ongoing with the D channel data links connected. Not used Remains lit when detecting Cyclic Redundancy Checking (CRC) errors. Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss. Remains lit when detecting Frame Alignment signal loss. Remains lit when receiving Frame Alignment signal loss alarm from a distant ofce. Remains lit when a pattern of consecutive 1 is received. The distant ofce transmits this signal for a loop-back test. B channel status ON OFF Flash (60 IPM) Flash (120 IPM) : More than 10 channels are busy : All channels are idle : Only one channel is busy : 2 through 10 channels are busy

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENSE (Rotary SW)
F 4

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


0-3 4-F Not used

FUNCTION

CHECK

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be set by CM05.


SW1-4: ON 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

AP No.

NOTE 1

SW1-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

SW No.

Continued on next page

295
90294-11

PN-24PRTA (PRT)

SWITCH NAME
MB (Toggle SW)
ON

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


UP DOWN ON

FUNCTION
For make-busy For normal operation Source clock signal from network is sent to the PLO 0 input on MP card. Source clock signal from network is not sent to the PLO 0 input on MP card. Source clock signal from network is sent to the PLO 1 input on MP card. Source clock signal from network is not sent to the PLO 1 input on MP card. Remote loop-back For normal operation Local loop-back (AIS send) For normal operation Set equalizer according to the cable length between the PBX and the MDF.
SW0-5 SW0-6 SW0-7

CHECK

NOTE 2 SW0 (Piano Key SW)


OFF 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ON

1 NOTE 3 NOTE 4

OFF

2 NOTE 3 NOTE 4

ON

OFF ON

3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF 8 OFF

CABLE LENGTH

ON ON ON ON OFF OFF

ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

0-40m (0-131.2ft.) 40-80m (131.2-262.5ft.) 80-120m (262.5-394ft.) 120-160m (394-525ft.) 160-200m (525-656ft.) Signal is not sent

Not used
Continued on next page

296
90294-11

PN-24PRTA (PRT)

SWITCH NAME
SW1 (Piano Key SW)
OFF 4 3 2 1 ON

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


1 2 3 OFF OFF OFF ON 4 OFF 1 OFF Not used Not used Not used

FUNCTION

CHECK

AP No. 04-15 AP No. 20-31 Always set to OFF

NOTE 4 SW2 (Dip SW)


OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

[North America only for AT&T] ON 2 OFF Deletion of Area Code on International Outgoing call No deletion of Area Code on International Outgoing call

[Australia/Other countries] OFF 3 4 5 6 7 8 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Always set to OFF Always set to OFF Always set to OFF Always set to OFF Always set to OFF Always set to OFF Always set to OFF
Continued on next page

297
90294-11

PN-24PRTA (PRT)

SWITCH NAME
JPR0 (Jumper pin)

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


UP DOWN

FUNCTION
Neutral grounding on the receiving line is provided. Neutral grounding on the receiving line is not provided. Line impedance: 100 ohms Line impedance: 110 ohms Neutral grounding on the transmitting line is provided. Neutral grounding on the transmitting line is not provided. Clock Source Clock Receiver AIS signal is sent out when makebusy or power on. AIS signal is not sent out when make-busy or power on.

CHECK

JPR1 (Jumper pin)

Right Left

JPS (Jumper pin)

UP DOWN

MAS (Jumper pin)

UP DOWN

AISS (Jumper pin)

UP DOWN

Continued on next page

The gure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the gure and , the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned. NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position. NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card.

298
90294-11

PN-24PRTA (PRT)

NOTE 3: Set SW0-1 and SW0-2 as follows:

PRT0

PRT1

PRT2

PRT8 REMARKS
MP card will receive the clock signal from PRT0 at its PLO0 input.

CONDITIONS SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW 0-1 0-2 0-1 0-2 0-1 0-2 0-1 0-2 0-1 0-2
When one PRT ON OFF is provided.

When more than one PRT is provided.

MP card will receive the clock signal from PRT0 at its PLO0 input, under normal conditions. Should a clock failure ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF occur with PRT0, MP card will automatically switch to the PLO1 input which gets clock from PRT1.

NOTE 4: When the PBX is a clock source office, set the SW0-1 and SW0-2 on all the PRT cards mounted in PIM0 to OFF. NOTE 5: Mount the PRT card which receives a source clock signal into PIM 0.

299

Rev.1.1 90294-11

PN-4RSTB (MFR)

PN-4RSTB (MFR)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

SENS RUN MB

SW OPE3 OPE2 OPE1 OPE0

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
RUN OPE0-3

COLOR
Green Red

FUNCTION
Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally. Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use. Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

300
90300-10

PN-4RSTB (MFR)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENS (Rotary SW)
F 4

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


4-F

FUNCTION

CHECK

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be set by CM05


SW-8: ON SW-8: OFF 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

AP No.

SW No.

NOTE1 0-3 MB (Toggle SW)


ON

Not used UP DOWN For make-busy For normal operation For make-busy No. 0 circuit For normal operation For make-busy No. 1 circuit For normal operation For make-busy No. 2 circuit For normal operation For make-busy No. 3 circuit For normal operation

NOTE2 SW (Piano Key SW)


OFF 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ON

ON OFF

ON OFF

ON OFF

4 5 6 7 8

ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF

Not used

AP No. 04-15 AP No. 20-31

NOTE1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position. NOTE2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card.

301
90300-10

PN-4RSTC (CIR)

PN-4RSTC (CIR)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

SENSE RUN MB

SW1 BL3 BL2 BL1 BL0 JP0

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
RUN BL0-3

COLOR
Green Red

FUNCTION
Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally. Remains lit when receiving a CALLER ID (CLASS SM) signal.

302
90302-10

PN-4RSTC (CIR)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENSE (Rotary SW)
F 4

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


4-F

FUNCTION

CHECK

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-15) to be set by CM05.

AP No. 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 SW No. 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0-3 Not used UP DOWN 1 ON OFF 2 ON OFF 3 ON OFF For make-busy For normal operation For make-busy No. 0 circuit For normal operation For make-busy No. 1 circuit For normal operation For make-busy No. 2 circuit For normal operation For make-busy No. 3 circuit For normal operation For normal operation

NOTE1

MB (Toggle SW)
ON

NOTE2 SW1 (Piano Key SW)


OFF 4 3 2 1 ON

4 JP0
(Jumper pin)

ON OFF RIGHT

NOTE1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position. NOTE2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card.

303
90302-10

PN-SC00 (CCH)

PN-SC00 (CCH)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors
SW1

SENS RUN MB

SW0 LC LPB

RS

TO MODEM ( FOR ANALOG INTERFACE)

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
RUN LC LPB

COLOR
Green Green Green

FUNCTION
Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally. Remains lit when communications are normally ongoing with the common signalling channel data links connected. Remains lit when a loop-back test is in progress.

304
90304-10

PN-SC00 (CCH)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENS (Rotary SW)
F 4

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


4-F

FUNCTION

CHECK

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be set by CM05.


SW0-4: ON 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

AP No.

SW0-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

SW No.

NOTE1 0-3 MB (Toggle SW)


ON

Not used UP DOWN ON For make-busy For normal operation Loop-back test For normal operation Analog interface Digital interface RS-232C RTS signal (to MODEM) ON NOTE3 RS-232C RTS signal (to MODEM) OFF AP No. 04-15 AP No. 20-31
Continued on next page

NOTE2 SW0 (Piano Key SW)


OFF 4 3 2 1 ON

1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF

305
90304-10

PN-SC00 (CCH)

SWITCH NAME
SW1(Dip SW)

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


ON 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON 5 OFF 6 7 8 ON OFF OFF OFF

FUNCTION
Common channel signalling data transmission speed (For Digital Interface)
TRANSMISSION SPEED 48kbps NOTE4 48kbps NOTE4 56kbps 64kbps SW 1-1 ON ON ON ON SW 1-2 ON ON ON ON SW 1-3 OFF ON OFF ON SW 1-4 OFF OFF ON ON SW 1-5 ON ON ON ON

CHECK

ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Common channel signalling data transmission speed (For Analog Interface) Set switches (SW1-1 - SW1-5) to OFF. A-law -law Always set to OFF Always set to OFF

The gure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the gure and , the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned. NOTE1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position. NOTE2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card. NOTE3: This setting is available when SW0-2 is set to ON (Analog Interface). NOTE4: The following two kind of rate adaptation method are available in 48 Kbps data transmission. The rate adaptation method must be set to match the rate adaptation of master office.
SW1-3: OFF 48kbps 1 Data 1 1 Data SW1-3: ON 48kbps 1

306
90304-10

PN-SC01 (DCH)

PN-SC01 (DCH)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors
SW1

SENS RUN MB

SW0 LC LPB

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
RUN LC LPB

COLOR
Green Green Green

FUNCTION
Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally. Remains lit when communications are normally ongoing with the D channel data links connected. Not used

307
90307-10

PN-SC01 (DCH)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENS (Rotary SW)
F

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


4-F

FUNCTION

CHECK

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be set by CM05.


SW0-4: ON 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

AP No.
4

SW0-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

NOTE1 0-3 MB (Toggle SW)


ON

SW No.

Not used UP DOWN For make-busy For normal operation Always set to OFF Always set to OFF Always set to OFF AP No. 04-15 AP No. 20-31
Continued on next page

NOTE2 SW0 (Piano Key SW)


OFF 4 3 2 1 ON

1 2 3

OFF OFF OFF ON

4 OFF

308
90307-10

PN-SC01 (DCH)

SWITCH NAME
SW1 (Dip SW)
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

FUNCTION
Always set to OFF Always set to OFF Always set to OFF Always set to OFF Always set to OFF Always set to OFF Always set to OFF Always set to OFF

CHECK

The gure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the gure and , the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned. NOTE1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position. NOTE2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card.

309
90307-10

PN-SC03 (ICH)

PN-SC03 (ICH)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

SENSE RUN MB

DOPE7 DOPE6 DOPE5 DOPE4 DOPE3 DOPE2 DOPE1 DOPE0

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
RUN DOPE7 DOPE6 DOPE5 DOPE4 DOPE3 DOPE2 DOPE1 DOPE0

COLOR
Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green

FUNCTION
Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally. Remains lit when No. 7 circuit D channel link is connected. Remains lit when No. 6 circuit D channel link is connected. Remains lit when No. 5 circuit D channel link is connected. Remains lit when No. 4 circuit D channel link is connected. Remains lit when No. 3 circuit D channel link is connected. Remains lit when No. 2 circuit D channel link is connected. Remains lit when No. 1 circuit D channel link is connected. Remains lit when No. 0 circuit D channel link is connected.

310
90310-10

PN-SC03 (ICH)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENSE (Rotary SW)
F 4

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


4-F

FUNCTION

CHECK

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-15) to be set by CM05.

AP No. 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 SW No. 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0-3 Not used UP DOWN For make-busy For normal operation

NOTE1 MB (Toggle SW)


ON

NOTE2

The gure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the gure and , the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned. NOTE1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position. NOTE2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card.

311
90310-10

PN-SC03-A (CSH)

PN-SC03-A (CSH)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

SENSE RUN MB

SW1 DOPE7 DOPE6 DOPE5 DOPE4 DOPE3 DOPE2 DOPE1 DOPE0

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
RUN DOPE7 DOPE6 DOPE5 DOPE4 DOPE3 DOPE2 DOPE1 DOPE0

COLOR
Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green

FUNCTION
Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally. Remains lit when No. 7 circuit D channel link is connected. Remains lit when No. 6 circuit D channel link is connected. Remains lit when No. 5 circuit D channel link is connected. Remains lit when No. 4 circuit D channel link is connected. Remains lit when No. 3 circuit D channel link is connected. Remains lit when No. 2 circuit D channel link is connected. Remains lit when No. 1 circuit D channel link is connected. Remains lit when No. 0 circuit D channel link is connected.

312
90312-10

PN-SC03-A (CSH)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SENSE (Rotary SW)
F

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


4-F

FUNCTION

CHECK

Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to be set by CM05.


SW1-1: ON 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

AP No.
4

SW1-1: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

NOTE1 0-3 MB (Toggle SW)


ON

SW No.

Not used UP DOWN For make-busy For normal operation Not used Not used Not used AP No. 04-15 AP No. 20-31

NOTE2 SW1 (Piano SW)


OFF 4 3 2 1 ON

1 2 3

OFF OFF OFF ON

4 OFF

The gure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the gure and , the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned. NOTE1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position. NOTE2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card.

313
90312-10

PZ-M537 (EXPMEM)

PZ-M537 (EXPMEM)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors
FACE

SW

REAR

CONNR

CONNR: To CONN connector on PN-CP14 (MP) or PN-AP00-B (AP00)

314
90314-10

PZ-M537 (EXPMEM)

Lamps Indications This card has no lamps.

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SW (Dip SW)
ON 1 2 3 4

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


ON 1 OFF 2 3 4 OFF OFF OFF

FUNCTION
For normal operation (Memory backup ON) Not used (Memory backup OFF) Not used Not used Not used

CHECK

The gure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the gure and , the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

315
90314-10

PZ-M537 (EXPMEM)

Mounting PZ-M537 Card When mounting the EXPMEM card on the AP00/MP card, do the following procedure. STEP1: Take off three screws from the rear side of EXPMEM support. NOTE: Supports and screws are attached to the EXPMEM card. STEP2: Connect the CONNR connector on the EXPMEM card and the CONN connector on the AP00/MP card. STEP3: Secure the EXPMEM card to the AP00/MP card with three screws which taken by STEP1.

SUPPORT

EXPMEM CARD

WHEN MOUNTING EXPMEM CARD ON THE AP00 CARD


CONNR CONNECTOR EXPMEM CARD

WHEN MOUNTING EXPMEM CARD ON THE MP CARD


CONNR CONNECTOR EXPMEM CARD

AP00 CARD

MP CARD

CONN CONNECTOR

CONN CONNECTOR

316
90314-10

PZ-M542 (CONN)

PZ-M542 (CONN)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

TRS21 JP2

RCV21

FOR No.2 CIRCUIT RCV11 LT TO LTC CONNECTOR ON BWB IN PIM

JP1

TO CHAMP CONNECTOR (MDF)

FOR No.1 CIRCUIT RCV01

TRS11

LTC

TRS01

FOR No.0 CIRCUIT

JP0

COAXIAL CONNECTOR

Lamp Indications This card has no lamps.

317
90317-10

PZ-M542 (CONN)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
JP0

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


RIGHT LEFT

FUNCTION
For coaxial connectors (No.0 circuit) For champ connector (LT connector) (No.0 circuit) For coaxial connectors (No.1 circuit) For champ connector (LT connector) (No.1 circuit) For coaxial connectors (No.2 circuit) For champ connector (LT connector) (No.2 circuit)

CHECK

JP1

RIGHT LEFT

JP2

RIGHT LEFT

The gure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the gure and , the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

318
90317-10

PZ-M557 (CONN)

PZ-M557 (CONN)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

JP2

FOR No.2 CIRCUIT TRS10

TRS20

RCV20

RCV10

JP1

TO CHAMP CONNECTOR (MDF)

FOR No.1 CIRCUIT TRS00

LT

TO LTC CONNECTOR ON BWB IN PIM

LTC

FOR No.0 CIRCUIT

RCV00

JP0

COAXIAL CONNECTOR

Lamp Indications This card has no lamps.

319
90319-10

PZ-M557 (CONN)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
JP0

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


RIGHT LEFT

FUNCTION
For coaxial connectors (No.0 circuit) For champ connector (LT connector) (No.0 circuit) For coaxial connectors (No.1 circuit) For champ connector (LT connector) (No.1 circuit) For coaxial connectors (No.2 circuit) For champ connector (LT connector) (No.2 circuit)

CHECK

JP1

RIGHT LEFT

JP2

RIGHT LEFT

The gure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the gure and , the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

320
90319-10

CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS


LINE/TRUNK CARD

LINE/TRUNK CARD
The table below shows the line/trunk cards to be explained in this section.

List of Line/Trunk Cards


EXTRACTION/ INSERTION WITH POWER ON X: ALLOWED : ALLOWED AFTER MB* : NOT ALLOWED
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

NAME (FUNCTIONAL NAME)

LAMP X: PROVIDED : NOT PROVIDED

SWITCH X: PROVIDED : NOT PROVIDED

REFERENCE PAGE

PN-2AMPA (AMP) PN-AUCA (AUC) PN-CFTA (CFT) PN-CFTB (CFT) PN-2COTD (COT) PN-4COTA-A (COT) PN-4COTB (COT) PN-4COTE (COT) PN-4COTF (COT) PN-4COTG (COT) PN-6COTJ (COT) PN-8COTQ (COT) PN-8COTR (COT) PN-8COTS (COT) PN-8COTT (COT) PN-8COTU (COT) PN-2CSIA (CSI) PN-2CSIA-A (CSI) PN-4DATC (DAT)

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X

page 324 page 325 page 326 page 327 page 328 page 329 page 330 page 331 page 332 page 333 page 334 page 335 page 336 page 337 page 338 page 338-1 page 339 page 342 page 345
Continued on next page

*MB = Make Busy


321
Rev.1.1 90321-11

CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS


LINE/TRUNK CARD

List of Line/Trunk Cards


EXTRACTION/ INSERTION WITH POWER ON X: ALLOWED : ALLOWED AFTER MB* : NOT ALLOWED
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

NAME (FUNCTIONAL NAME)

LAMP X: PROVIDED : NOT PROVIDED

SWITCH X: PROVIDED : NOT PROVIDED

REFERENCE PAGE

PN-2DITA (DIT) PN-4DITB (DIT) PN-DK00 (DK) PN-2DLCB/2DLCN (DLC) PN-2DLCC (DLC) PN-4DLCF (DLC) PN-4DLCM (DLC) PN-4DLCQ (DLC) PN-8DLCL (DLC) PN-8DLCP (DLC) PN-2DPCB (DPC) PN-2ILCA (ILC) PN-4LCC (LC) PN-4LCD-A (LC) PN-4LCE (LC) PN-4LCF (LC) PN-4LCK (LC) PN-4LCL (LC) PN-4LCV (LC) PN-4LCW (LC) PN-8LCAA (LC)

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X

page 346 page 347 page 348 page 349 page 350 page 351 page 352 page 353 page 354 page 355 page 356 page 360 page 363 page 364 page 365 page 366 page 367 page 368 page 369 page 370 page 371
Continued on next page

*MB = Make Busy

322
90321-11

CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS


LINE/TRUNK CARD

List of Line/Trunk Cards


EXTRACTING/ INSERTION WITH POWER ON X: ALLOWED : ALLOWED AFTER MB* : NOT ALLOWED
X X

NAME (FUNCTIONAL NAME)

LAMP X: PROVIDED : NOT PROVIDED

SWITCH X: PROVIDED : NOT PROVIDED

REFERENCE PAGE

PN-2LDTA (LDT) PN-M03 (M03) PN-M10 (M10) PN-2ODTA (ODT) PN-2ODTB (ODT) PN-8RSTA (PBR) PN-TNTA (TNT) PN-4VCTI (VCT) PZ-8PFTB (PFT) PZ-VM00/ PZ-VM00-M (VM) PN-VM01 (VM)

X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X

page 372 page 373 page 376

X X X X X X

page 378 page 379 page 380 page 381 page 383 page 385 page 386

page 389

*MB = Make Busy

323

Rev.1.1 90321-11

PN-2AMPA (AMP)

PN-2AMPA (AMP)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

BL1 BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
BL0, 1

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use. Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings This card has no switches.

324
90324-10

PN-AUCA (AUC)

PN-AUCA (AUC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

BL1 BL0

CN1

TO COT CARD FOR PFT CONNECTION

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
BL0, 1

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use. Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings This card has no switches.

325
90325-10

PN-CFTA (CFT)

PN-CFTA (CFT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

BL

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
BL

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when this card is in use. Flashes (60 IPM) when the circuit on the card is in make-busy state on the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings This card has no switches.

326
90326-10

PN-CFTB (CFT)

PN-CFTB (CFT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

BL

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
BL

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when this card is in use. Flashes (60 IPM) when the circuit on the card is in make-busy state on the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings This card has no switches.

327
90327-10

PN-2COTD (COT)

PN-2COTD (COT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

BL1 BL0 LF1 LF0

CN0

TO PN-AUCA CARD FOR PFT CONNECTION

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
BL0, 1

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use. Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned. Remains lit when the corresponding circuit detects a meter signal or a line fault condition.

LF0, 1

Red

Switch Settings This card has no switches.

328
90328-10

PN-4COTA-A (COT)

PN-4COTA-A (COT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

BL3 BL2 BL1 BL0

CN1

TO PN-AUCA CARD FOR PFT CONNECTION

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
BL0-3

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use. Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings This card has no switches.

329
90329-10

PN-4COTB (COT)

PN-4COTB (COT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

BL3 BL2 BL1 BL0

CN1

TO PN-AUCA CARD FOR PFT CONNECTION

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
BL0-3

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use. Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings This card has no switches.

330
90330-10

PN-4COTE (COT)

PN-4COTE (COT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

BL3 BL2 BL1 BL0 LF3 LF2 LF1 LF0

CN1

TO PN-AUCA CARD FOR PFT CONNECTION

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
BL0-3

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use. Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned. Remains lit when the corresponding circuit detects a line fault condition.

LF0-3

Red

Switch Settings This card has no switches.

331
90331-10

PN-4COTF (COT)

PN-4COTF (COT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

BL3 BL2 BL1 BL0

CN1

TO PN-AUCA CARD FOR PFT CONNECTION

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
BL0-3

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use. Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings This card has no switches.

332
90332-10

PN-4COTG (COT)

PN-4COTG (COT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

BL3 BL2 BL1 BL0

CN1

TO PN-AUCA CARD FOR PFT CONNECTION

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
BL0-3

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use. Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings This card has no switches.

333
90333-10

PN-6COTJ (COT)

PN-6COTJ (COT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

BL5 BL4 BL3 BL2 BL1 BL0 LF5 LF4 LF3 LF2 LF1 LF0

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
BL0-5

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use. Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned. Remains lit when the corresponding circuit detects a line fault condition.

LF0-5

Red

Switch Settings This card has no switches.

334
90334-10

PN-8COTQ (COT)

PN-8COTQ (COT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

BL7 BL6 BL5 BL4 BL3 BL2 BL1 BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
BL0-7

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use. Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings This card has no switches.

335
90335-10

PN-8COTR (COT)

PN-8COTR (COT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

BL7 BL6 BL5 BL4 BL3 BL2 BL1 BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
BL0-7

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use. Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings This card has no switches.

336
90336-10

PN-8COTS (COT)

PN-8COTS (COT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

BL7 BL6 BL5 BL4 BL3 BL2 BL1 BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
BL0-7

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use. Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings This card has no switches.

337
90337-10

PN-8COTT (COT)

PN-8COTT (COT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

BL7 BL6 BL5 BL4 BL3 BL2 BL1 BL0 LF7 LF6 LF5 LF4 LF3 LF2 LF1 LF0

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
BL0-7

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use. Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned. Remains lit when the corresponding circuit detects a line fault condition.

LF0-7

Red

Switch Settings This card has no switches.

338
90338-10

PN-8COTU (COT)

PN-8COTU (COT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

BL7 BL6 BL5 BL4 BL3 BL2 BL1 BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
BL0-7

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use. Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings This card has no switches.

338-1

Rev.1.1 90338A11

THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY.

338-2

Rev.1.1 90338A11

PN-2CSIA (CSI)

PN-2CSIA (CSI)
Locations of Lamps, Swtiches and Connectors

OPE LB B13 B12 B11 B10 B03 B02 B01 B00 DL1

DL0

339
90339-10

PN-2CSIA (CSI)

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
OPE LB B13 B12

COLOR
Green Red Red Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use. Remains lit when a loop-back is in progress. Not used (Flash [60 IPM]) B channel status ON : B2 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in use. OFF : B2 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in idle. Flash (60 IPM) : ZT is not connected to the No. 1 circuit. ZT is in make-busy status. B channel status ON : B1 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in use. OFF : B1 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in idle. Flash (60 IPM) : ZT is not connected to the No. 1 circuit. ZT is in make-busy status. B channel status ON : B0 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in use. OFF : B0 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in idle. Flash (60 IPM) : ZT is not connected to the No. 1 circuit. ZT is in make-busy status. Not used (Flash [60 IPM]) B channel status ON : B2 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in use. OFF : B2 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in idle. Flash (60 IPM) : ZT is not connected to the No. 0 circuit. ZT is in make-busy status. B channel status ON : B1 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in use. OFF : B1 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in idle. Flash (60 IPM) : ZT is not connected to the No. 0 circuit. ZT is in make-busy status.
Continued on next page

B11

Red

B10

Red

B03 B02

Red Red

B01

Red

340
90339-10

PN-2CSIA (CSI)

LAMP NAME
B00

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
B channel status ON : B0 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in use. OFF : B0 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in idle. Flash (60 IPM) : ZT is not connected to the No. 0 circuit. ZT is in make-busy status.

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
DL0 (Rotary SW)
0

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


0 0-F 1-F Not used

FUNCTION

CHECK

For normal operation

NOTE DL1 (Rotary SW)


0

0 0-F 1-F

For normal operation

Not used

NOTE The gure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the gure and , the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned. NOTE: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.

341
90339-10

PN-2CSIA-A (CSI)

PN-2CSIA-A (CSI)
Locations of Lamps, Swtiches and Connectors

OPE LB B13 B12 B11 B10 B03 B02 B01 B00 DL1

SP

DL0

342
90342-10

PN-2CSIA-A (CSI)

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
OPE LB B13 B12

COLOR
Green Red Red Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use. Remains lit when a loop-back is in progress. Not used (Flash [60 IPM]) B channel status ON : B2 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in use. OFF : B2 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in idle. Flash (60 IPM) : CS is not connected to the No. 1 circuit. CS is in make-busy status. B channel status ON : B1 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in use. OFF : B1 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in idle. Flash (60 IPM) : CS is not connected to the No. 1 circuit. CS is in make-busy status. B channel status ON : B0 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in use. OFF : B0 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in idle. Flash (60 IPM) : CS is not connected to the No. 1 circuit. CS is in make-busy status. Not used (Flash [60 IPM]) B channel status ON : B2 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in use. OFF : B2 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in idle. Flash (60 IPM) : CS is not connected to the No. 0 circuit. CS is in make-busy status. B channel status ON : B1 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in use. OFF : B1 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in idle. Flash (60 IPM) : CS is not connected to the No. 0 circuit. CS is in make-busy status.
Continued on next page

B11

Red

B10

Red

B03 B02

Red Red

B01

Red

343
90342-10

PN-2CSIA-A (CSI)

LAMP NAME
B00

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
B channel status ON : B0 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in use. OFF : B0 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in idle. Flash (60 IPM) : CS is not connected to the No. 0 circuit. CS is in make-busy status.

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
DL0 (Rotary SW)
0

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


0 0-F 1-F Not used

FUNCTION

CHECK

For normal operation

NOTE DL1 (Rotary SW)


0

0 0-F 1-F

For normal operation

Not used

NOTE SP (jumper SW)


1 2 3 Front

UP

For normal operation

DOWN

Not used

The gure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the gure and , the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned. NOTE: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.

344
90342-10

PN-4DATC (DAT)

PN-4DATC (DAT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

BL3 BL2 BL1 BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
BL0-3

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use. Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings This card has no switches.

345
90345-10

PN-2DITA (DIT)

PN-2DITA (DIT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

BL1 BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
BL0, 1

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use. Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings This card has no switches.

346
90346-10

PN-4DITB (DIT)

PN-4DITB (DIT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

BL3 BL2 BL1 BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
BL0-3

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use. Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings This card has no switches.

347
90347-10

PN-DK00 (DK)

PN-DK00 (DK)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

Lamp Indications This card has no lamps.

Switch Settings This card has no switches.

348
90348-10

PN-2DLCB/PN-DLCN (DLC)

PN-2DLCB/PN-2DLCN (DLC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

BL1 BL0

CN0

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
BL0, 1

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use. Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings This card has no switches.

349
90349-10

PN-2DLCC (DLC)

PN-2DLCC (DLC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

BL1 BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
BL0, 1

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use. Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings This card has no switches.

350
90350-10

PN-4DLCF (DLC)

PN-4DLCF (DLC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

BL3 BL2 BL1 BL0

CN1

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
BL0-3

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use. Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings This card has no switches.

351
90351-10

PN-4DLCM (DLC)

PN-4DLCM (DLC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

BL3 BL2 BL1 BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
BL0-3

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use. Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings This card has no switches.

352
90352-10

PN-4DLCQ (DLC)

PN-4DLCQ (DLC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

BL3 BL2 BL1 BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
BL0-3

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use. Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings This card has no switches.

353
90353-10

PN-8DLCL (DLC)

PN-8DLCL (DLC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

BL7 BL6 BL5 BL4 BL3 BL2 BL1 BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
BL0-7

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use. Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings This card has no switches.

354
90354-10

PN-8DLCP (DLC)

PN-8DLCP (DLC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

BL7 BL6 BL5 BL4 BL3 BL2 BL1 BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
BL0-7

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use. Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings This card has no switches.

355
90355-10

PN-2DPCB (DPC)

PN-2DPCB (DPC)
Location of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

RSC1 SDT1 RDR1 CDI1 RSC0 SDT0 RDR0 CDI0

BL1 LB11 LB12 BL0 LB01 LB02

SW1

SW0 XCN1 XCN0 RS1 RS0

To X.21 DTE/DCE or PN-M03 To V.24/V.28 DTE/DCE

356
90356-10

PN-2DPCB (DPC)

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
BL0

COLOR
Red No. 0 Circuit

FUNCTION
ON: Ready for digital data transmission or the circuit is busy. OFF: Fixed path is not connected. Flash (60IPM): Make-busy state or the system data for this card is not assigned. Flash (120IPM): Fixed path is connected. ON: Loop Back 1 is set. OFF: Normally operating. ON: Loop Back 2 is set. OFF: Normally operating. ON: RTS/C signal ON OFF: RTS/C signal OFF ON: TXD/T signal is 0. OFF: TXD/T signal is 1. ON: RXD/R signal is 0. OFF: RXD/R signal is 1. ON: DCD/I signal ON OFF: DCD/I signal OFF
Continued on next page

LB01 LB02 RSC0 SDT0 RDR0 CDI0

Red Red Green Green Green Green

357
90356-10

PN-2DPCB (DPC)

LAMP NAME
BL1

COLOR
Red No. 1 Circuit

FUNCTION
ON: Ready for digital data transmission or the circuit is busy. OFF: Fixed path is not connected. Flash (60IPM): Make-busy state or the system data for this card is not assigned. Flash (120IPM): Fixed path is connected. ON: Loop Back 1 is set. OFF: Normally operating. ON: Loop Back 2 is set. OFF: Normally operating. ON: RTS/C signal ON OFF: RTS/C signal OFF ON: TXD/T signal is 0. OFF: TXD/T signal is 1. ON: RXD/R signal is 0. OFF: RXD/R signal is 1. ON: DCD/I signal ON OFF: DCD/I signal OFF

LB11 LB12 RSC1 SDT1 RDR1 CDI1

Red Red Green Green Green Green

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SW1 (Piano Key SW)
OFF 4 3 2 1 ON

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


1 ON OFF 2 ON OFF 3 ON OFF 4 ON OFF No. 1 Circuit No. 0 Circuit

FUNCTION
Loop Back 1 ON Loop Back 1 OFF Loop Back 2 ON Loop Back 2 OFF Loop Back 1 ON Loop Back 1 OFF Loop Back 2 ON Loop Back 2 OFF

CHECK

Continued on next page

358
90356-10

PN-2DPCB (DPC)

SWITCH NAME
SW0 (Dip SW)
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


ON 1 OFF ON 2 OFF 3 4 OFF ON OFF ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF 7 8 OFF ON OFF No. 1 Circuit No. 0 Circuit

FUNCTION
Forcibly turning the DTR signal to ON The DTR signal from DTE goes through the card Forcibly turning the RTS/C signal to ON The RTS/C signal from DTE goes through the card Not used V.11 (X.21) interface V.24/V.28 (RS-232C) interface Forcibly turning the DTR signal to ON The DTR signal from DTE goes through the card Forcibly turning the RTS/C signal to ON The RTS/C signal from DTE goes through the card Not used V.11 (X.21) interface V.24/V.28 (RS-232C) interface

CHECK

The gure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the gure and , the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned. NOTE: When the power is on, disconnect the cables before unplugging the circuit card, and connect the cables after plugging the circuit card.

359
90356-10

PN-2ILCA (ILC)

PN-2ILCA (ILC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

ACT1 PAL1 LPB1 B21 B11 ACT0 PAL0 LPB0 B20 B10

SW1

SW0

360
90360-10

PN-2ILCA (ILC)

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
ACT1 PAL1 LPB1 B21 B11 ACT0 PAL0 LPB0 B20 B10

COLOR
Green Red Red Green Green Green Red Red Green Green No. 0 Circuit No.1 Circuit

FUNCTION
ON: Normally operating. OFF: Not operating. ON: Line is short-circuiting. OFF: Normally operating. OFF: Not used. ON: B2 channel is in use. OFF: B2 channel is idle. ON: B1 channel is in use. OFF: B1 channel is idle. ON: Normally operating. OFF: Not operating. ON: Line is short-circuiting. OFF: Normally operating. OFF: Not used ON: B2 channel is in use. OFF: B2 channel is idle. ON: B1 channel is in use. OFF: B1 channel is idle.

361
90360-10

PN-2ILCA (ILC)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SW1 (Piano Key SW)
OFF 4 3 2 1 ON

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


1 2 3 4 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 1 OFF ON 2

FUNCTION
Always set to OFF Always set to OFF Always set to OFF Always set to OFF Terminating register is No.0 provided. Circuit (Receiving) Terminating register is not provided. No.0 Circuit (Sending) Terminating register is provided. Terminating register is not provided.

CHECK

SW0 (Piano Key SW)


OFF 4 3 2 1 ON

OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF

Terminating register is No.1 provided. Circuit (Receiving) Terminating register is not provided. No.1 Circuit (Sending) Terminating register is provided. Terminating register is not provided.

The gure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the gure and , the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

362
90360-10

PN-4LCC (LC)

PN-4LCC (LC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

BL3 BL2 BL1 BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
BL0-3

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use. Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings This card has no switches.

363
90363-10

PN-4LCD-A (LC)

PN-4LCD-A (LC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

BL3 BL2 BL1 BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
BL0-3

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use. Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings This card has no switches.

364
90364-10

PN-4LCE (LC)

PN-4LCE (LC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

BL3 BL2 BL1 BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
BL0-3

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use. Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings This card has no switches.

365
90365-10

PN-4LCF (LC)

PN-4LCF (LC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

BL3 BL2 BL1 BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
BL0-3

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use. Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings This card has no switches.

366
90366-10

PN-4LCK (LC)

PN-4LCK (LC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

BL3 BL2 BL1 BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
BL0-3

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use. Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings This card has no switches.

367
90367-10

PN-4LCL (LC)

PN-4LCL (LC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

BL3 BL2 BL1 BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
BL0-3

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use. Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings This card has no switches.

368
90368-10

PN-4LCV (LC)

PN-4LCV (LC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

BL3 BL2 BL1 BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
BL0-3

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use. Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings This card has no switches.

369
90369-10

PN-4LCW (LC)

PN-4LCW (LC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

BL3 BL2 BL1 BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
BL0-3

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use. Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings This card has no switches.

370
90370-10

PN-8LCAA (LC)

PN-8LCAA (LC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

BL7 BL6 BL5 BL4 BL3 BL2 BL1 BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
BL0-7

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use. Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings This card has no switches.

371
90371-10

PN-2LDTA (LDT)

PN-2LDTA (LDT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

BL1 BL0

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
BL0, 1

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use. Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings This card has no switches.

372
90372-10

PN-M03 (M03)

PN-M03 (M03)
Location of Lamps, Switches and Connectors
OPRS OPER SW0 OPSD OPE RS SD RD CD ER DR CS SELX21 X21 To PN-2DPCB SELCN0 CN0 JP1B V35 JP1A To V.35 DTE/DCE

373
90373-10

PN-M03 (M03)

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
OPE RS SD RD CD ER DR CS SELX21 SELCN0

COLOR
Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green

FUNCTION
ON: This card is normally connected to the PN-2DPCB. OFF: This card is abnormally connected to the PN-2DPCB. ON: RTS signal is ON. OFF: RTS signal is OFF. ON: TXD signal is 0 (Space condition). OFF: TXD signal is 1 (Mark condition). ON: RXD signal is 0 (Space condition). OFF: RXD signal is 1 (Mark condition). ON: DCD signal is ON. OFF: DCD signal is OFF. ON: DTR signal is ON. OFF: DTR signal is OFF. ON: DSR signal is ON. OFF: DSR signal is OFF. ON: CTS signal is ON. OFF: CTS signal is OFF. ON: Connecting to the PN-2DPCB is available. OFF: Connecting to the PN-2DPCB is not available. Not used

374
90373-10

PN-M03 (M03)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SW0 (Dip SW)

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


1 2 OFF OFF Right Left Right Left Right Left

FUNCTION
Always set to OFF Not used TXC(2) signal is sent out. TXC(2) signal is inputted. TXC(2) signal is sent out. TXC(2) signal is inputted. Set the function of extending distance for TXD signal. Cancel the function of extending distance for TXD signal. Set the function of extending distance for RTS signal. Cancel the function of extending distance for RTS signal. Set the function of extending distance for DTR signal. Cancel the function of extending distance for DTR signal.

CHECK

2 1

ON

JP1A (Jumper pin)

NOTE JP1B (Jumper pin)

NOTE OPSD (Jumper pin)

OPRS (Jumper pin)

Right Left

OPER (Jumper pin)

Right Left

The gure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the gure and , the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned. NOTE: The JP1A and JP1B must be set to the same position each other.

375
90373-10

PN-M10 (M10)

PN-M10 (M10)
Location of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

JP3

JP4

CK0 CK1 TALM RALM

JP1

CN1

TO OPTICAL CABLE

JP0

JP2

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
CK0 CK1 TALM RALM

COLOR
Green Green Red Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when a Digital Trunk Interface is connected to No. 0 circuit on this card. Remains lit when a Digital Trunk Interface is connected to No. 1 circuit on this card. Remains lit when optical output is stopped. Remains lit when optical input is lost or stopped.

376
90376-11

PN-M10 (M10)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
JP0, 1 (Jumper pin)

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


UP

FUNCTION
When connected to E1 (2M) Digital Trunk Interface When connected to T1 (1.5M) Digital Trunk Interface Line code: B8ZS* is provided (For T1 interface) *B8ZS: Bipolar Eight Zero Substitution Line code: B8ZS* is not provide (For T1 interface) *B8ZS: Bipolar Eight Zero Substitution When connected to E1 (2M) Digital Trunk Interface When connected to T1 (1.5M) Digital Trunk Interface When connected to E1 (2M) Digital Trunk Interface When connected to T1 (1.5M) Digital Trunk Interface

CHECK

DOWN JP2 (Jumper pin) Right

Left

JP3 (Jumper pin)

Right Left

JP4 (Jumper pin)

UP DOWN

377

Rev.1.1 90376-11

PN-2ODTA (ODT)

PN-2ODTA (ODT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

BL1 BL0

CN1

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
BL0, 1

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use. Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings This card has no switches.

378
90378-10

PN-2ODTB (ODT)

PN-2ODTB (ODT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

BL1 BL0

CN1

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
BL0, 1

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use. Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

Switch Settings This card has no switches.

379
90379-10

PN-8RSTA (PBR)

PN-8RSTA (PBR)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

Lamp Indications This card has no lamps.

Switch Settings This card has no switches.

380
90380-10

PN-TNTA (TNT)

PN-TNTA (TNT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

SW

JACK1

JACK0

Lamp Indications This card has no lamps.

381
90381-10

PN-TNTA (TNT)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SW (Piano Key SW)
OFF 4 3 2 1 ON

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION

FUNCTION

CHECK

Volume adjustment for No.0 circuit

SWITCH NUMBER 1 2
1, 2 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON

VOLUME
10dB 7dB 4dB 1dB

Volume adjustment for No.1 circuit

SWITCH NUMBER 3 4
3, 4 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON

VOLUME
10dB 7dB 4dB 1dB

382
90381-10

PN-4VCTI (VCT)

PN-4VCTI (VCT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

BL3 BL2 BL1 BL0 SW1

IPTA IPT EXPA EXP

IPTA/IPT: FROM PN-IPTB CONNECTOR OR FROM OTHER PN-4VCTI CARD CONNECTOR EXPA/EXP: TO IPTA/IPT CONNECTOR OF OTHER PN-4VCTI CARD

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
BL0-3

COLOR
Red

FUNCTION
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use. Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.

383

Rev.1.1 90383-11

PN-4VCTI (VCT)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
SW1 (Piano Key SW)
OFF 4 3 2 1 ON

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION

FUNCTION

CHECK

Set the number per VCT card if two or more VCT cards are used. (Max. four VCT cards)

SW No.
1, 2

1
OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF

2
OFF OFF ON ON Not used

Card No.
0 1 2 3

ON OFF

Not used

The gure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the gure and , the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.

384

Rev.1.1 90383-11

PZ-8PFTB (PFT)

PZ-8PFTB (PFT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

PFT1

PFT0

Lamp Indications This card has no lamps.

Switch Settings This card has no switches.

385
90385-10

PZ-VM00/PZ-VM00-M (VM)

PZ-VM00/PZ-VM00-M (VM)
Location of Lamps, Switches and Connectors CPU Board (Top Side)
CPU Board (top side) RXD TXD MOD RI SW1-4 SW1-1 COM1

VM00/VM00-M Card

COM2

HDD BIOS Internal modem

NOTE: Only the PZVM00-M is equipped with internal modem.

DSP Board (Bottom Side)


VM00/VM00-M Card DSP Board (bottom side) BL7 BL0 SWP MB DSP PL3 PL0 RST

CN3 (VM01 Card Slot)

386

Rev.1.1 90386-11

PZ-VM00/PZ-VM00-M (VM)

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
CPU RXD Board TXD MOD RI HDD

COLOR
Green Red Green Red Red Not used Not used Not used Incoming call Accessing to the HDD Built-in hard disk is faulty

FUNCTION

BIOS

Red

BIOS programming is in operation DOS mode has been activated Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use. Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned. 30 seconds after the MB switch is turned ON (upward) (The circuit card can be plugged/unplugged while this pilot lamp is on.) According to voice mail application program in use.

DSP BL0-7 Red Board SWP DSP Red Green/ Flashing Red/ Flashing PL0-3 Red

DSP circuit operating

387
90386-11

PZ-VM00/PZ-VM00-M (VM)

Switch Settings

SWITCH NAME
MB (Toggle SW)
ON

SWITCH SETTING NUMBER POSITION


UP DOWN

FUNCTION
For make-busy For normal operation

CHECK

NOTE1 RST (Toggle SW)

Push when starting up this card, after MB switch is set to DOWN position.

NOTE2 SW1 (Piano Key SW)


OFF 4 3 2 1 ON

ON 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF 4 OFF

BIOS Redirect Utility (Key board) NOTE3 Normal Operation BIOS Redirect Utility (Floppy Drive) NOTE3 Normal Operation COM2: Use internal modem for remote maintenance COM2: RS-232C (For local direct connection to maintenance console) Not used

NOTE2

The gure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in the SETTING POSITION column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the gure and , the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned. NOTE1: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card. NOTE2: When SW1 settings have changed, RST switch must be pushed. NOTE3: Use BIOS Redirect only when assisted by NEC.

388
90386-11

PZ-VM01 (VM)

PZ-VM01 (VM)
Location of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

VM01 Card (on VM00 DSP Board)

PL7 PL4

Lamp Indications

LAMP NAME
PL4-7

COLOR
Red DSP circuit operating

FUNCTION

Switch Settings This card has no switches.

389
90389-10

THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY.

390
90390-10

S-ar putea să vă placă și